Upload
others
View
1
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Application Operations Guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23
Document Version 109 ndash 2015-11-30
CUSTOMER
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
2
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Typographic Conventions
Typographic Conventions
Type Style Description
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field names screen titles
pushbuttons labels menu names menu paths and menu options
Textual cross-references to other documents
Example Emphasized words or expressions
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names
transaction codes table names and key concepts of a programming language when they
are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
Example Output on the screen This includes file and directory names and their paths messages
names of variables and parameters source text and names of installation upgrade and
database tools
Example Exact user entry These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they
appear in the documentation
ltExamplegt Variable user entry Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters
with appropriate entries to make entries in the system
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard for example F2 or ENTER
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Document History
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 3
Document History
Caution
Make sure you use the current version of the Application Operations Guide
The current version of the Application Operations Guide is at httpservicesapcominstguides on SAP Service
Marketplace
The following table provides an overview of the most important changes in prior versions
Version Change
10 First version for SAP POS 23
101 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP01
107 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP07
Changed document version to match SP07
Added a reference to SAP Note 1916385
Reorganized document sections to a new logical order
108 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP08 Modifiedadded the following sections
363 Backup and Restore
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
109 Moved content to the updated template
4
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Getting Started 7 11 About this Guide 7 12 Global Definitions 7 13 Important SAP Notes 8
2 Technical System Landscape 9 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix 9 22 Related Documentation 10
3 Store Components of SAP POS 12 31 Analysis Tools 12 32 Trace Files and Log Files 13
321 File Handler Configuration Section 13 322 Log Feature Configuration 14 323 Log File Format 15 324 POS Client Logging 15 325 Xpress Server Logging 17
33 Root Cause Analysis 20 331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool 20
34 Integration with CA Introscope 23 341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection 24 342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 27
35 Technical Monitoring 27 36 Management of SAP POS 27
361 Administration Tools of Software Components 27 362 Starting and Stopping 29 363 Backup and Restore 31 364 Periodic Tasks 33 365 Load Balancing 34 366 Management of Logon Data 34
37 High Availability 35 38 Software Change Management 36
381 Transport and Change Management 36 382 Development Requests and Development Release Management 37 383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation 37
39 Troubleshooting 37
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 39 41 Technical System Landscape 39
411 Graphic Landscape Description 39 412 Language Support 39 413 JVM Memory Settings 40 414 Database Monitoring 41 415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 46
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 5
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 47 42 Integration with CA Introscope 47
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server 48 422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client 50 423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 53
43 Technical Monitoring 53 44 Management 53
441 Administration Tools of Software Components 53 442 Disable Sample NTM Modules 54 443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL54 444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging 55 445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs 55 446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups 55 447 Page File 55 448 SQL Server Memory56 449 Logging to DB 58 4410 Starting and Stopping 58 4411 Backup and Restore 58 4412 Periodic Tasks 59 4413 Logging On and Load Balancing 59 4414 User Management62 4415 Printing 62
45 High Availability 62 46 Software Change Management 64
461 Transport and Change Management64 462 Development Request and Development Release Management 64
47 Troubleshooting64 471 Works Cited 64
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 65 51 Technical System Landscape 65
511 System Landscape65 512 Language Support 65 513 Proposed Components 66 514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 66
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis 66 521 Trace and Log Files 66 522 Database Monitors 68 523 Operating System Monitors68 524 Workload Monitors68 525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools 68 526 Interface Monitors 69 527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors 69 528 Software Component Monitors 69
53 Integration with CA Introscope 69 531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere 70 532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process 72 533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 73
54 Technical Monitoring 73 55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 74
6
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
551 Administration Tools of Software Components 74 552 Starting and Stopping 74
56 Backup and Restore 75 57 Classification 75 58 Backup and Restore 75 59 Periodic Tasks 76
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks 76 592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks 77
510 Logging On and Load Balancing 77 511 User Management 78
5111 User Management Tools 78 512 Printing 80 513 High Availability 80
5131 High Availability at Application Level 80 5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing 82 5133 High Availability at a Database Level 84
514 Transport and Change Management 85 515 Troubleshooting 85 516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore 86
6 Support Desk Management 89 61 Remote Support Setup 89 62 Problem Message Handover 89
7 Appendix 90 71 Related Guides 90
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
1 Getting Started
Caution
This guide does not replace the daily operations handbook that we recommend customers to create for
their specific production operations
11 About this Guide
This guide provides operations-related information for SAP POINT-OF-SALE (SAP POS) SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL1 (SDTR) and SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
The design implementation and optimized operation of your SAP POS application 24 hours a day has never been
more vital for your business success
This guide provides a starting point for managing your SAP POS application and maintaining and running it to its
full potential It contains specific information for various tasks and lists the tools that you can use to implement
the application
You can find documentation for SAP POS SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION along with this guide in the SAP Library under Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale
Target Groups
Technical Consultants
System Administrators
Solution Consultants
Business Process Owner
Support Specialist
12 Global Definitions
SAP POS Application
SAP POS represents a market view of groups of related business scenarios This delivery contains SAP POS
components that are essential for implementing all solution-related business scenarios processes and functions
Implementation knowledge is included with each solution
1 Formerly called SAP CENTRALIZED ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (SAP CEFT) which was known previously
as TRANSNET
8
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
Business Scenario
From a microeconomic perspective a business scenario is a cycle which consists of several different
interconnected logical processes in time Typically a business scenario includes several company departments
and involves with other business partners From a technical point of view a business scenario needs at lea st one
SAP application (SAP ERP SAP SCM or others) for each cycle and possibly other third-party systems A business
scenario is a unit which can be implemented separately and reflects the customerrsquos prospective course of
business
Component
A component is the smallest individual unit considered within the Solution Development Lifecycle components
are separately produced delivered installed and maintained
13 Important SAP Notes
Caution
Check regularly for updates available for the Application Operations Guide
Important SAP Notes
SAP Note
Number
Title Comment
1916385 SAP POS 23 RCA and Monitoring Guide Solution Manager Diagnostics and System
Monitoring
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
2
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Typographic Conventions
Typographic Conventions
Type Style Description
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field names screen titles
pushbuttons labels menu names menu paths and menu options
Textual cross-references to other documents
Example Emphasized words or expressions
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names
transaction codes table names and key concepts of a programming language when they
are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
Example Output on the screen This includes file and directory names and their paths messages
names of variables and parameters source text and names of installation upgrade and
database tools
Example Exact user entry These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they
appear in the documentation
ltExamplegt Variable user entry Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters
with appropriate entries to make entries in the system
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard for example F2 or ENTER
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Document History
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 3
Document History
Caution
Make sure you use the current version of the Application Operations Guide
The current version of the Application Operations Guide is at httpservicesapcominstguides on SAP Service
Marketplace
The following table provides an overview of the most important changes in prior versions
Version Change
10 First version for SAP POS 23
101 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP01
107 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP07
Changed document version to match SP07
Added a reference to SAP Note 1916385
Reorganized document sections to a new logical order
108 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP08 Modifiedadded the following sections
363 Backup and Restore
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
109 Moved content to the updated template
4
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Getting Started 7 11 About this Guide 7 12 Global Definitions 7 13 Important SAP Notes 8
2 Technical System Landscape 9 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix 9 22 Related Documentation 10
3 Store Components of SAP POS 12 31 Analysis Tools 12 32 Trace Files and Log Files 13
321 File Handler Configuration Section 13 322 Log Feature Configuration 14 323 Log File Format 15 324 POS Client Logging 15 325 Xpress Server Logging 17
33 Root Cause Analysis 20 331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool 20
34 Integration with CA Introscope 23 341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection 24 342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 27
35 Technical Monitoring 27 36 Management of SAP POS 27
361 Administration Tools of Software Components 27 362 Starting and Stopping 29 363 Backup and Restore 31 364 Periodic Tasks 33 365 Load Balancing 34 366 Management of Logon Data 34
37 High Availability 35 38 Software Change Management 36
381 Transport and Change Management 36 382 Development Requests and Development Release Management 37 383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation 37
39 Troubleshooting 37
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 39 41 Technical System Landscape 39
411 Graphic Landscape Description 39 412 Language Support 39 413 JVM Memory Settings 40 414 Database Monitoring 41 415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 46
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 5
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 47 42 Integration with CA Introscope 47
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server 48 422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client 50 423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 53
43 Technical Monitoring 53 44 Management 53
441 Administration Tools of Software Components 53 442 Disable Sample NTM Modules 54 443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL54 444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging 55 445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs 55 446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups 55 447 Page File 55 448 SQL Server Memory56 449 Logging to DB 58 4410 Starting and Stopping 58 4411 Backup and Restore 58 4412 Periodic Tasks 59 4413 Logging On and Load Balancing 59 4414 User Management62 4415 Printing 62
45 High Availability 62 46 Software Change Management 64
461 Transport and Change Management64 462 Development Request and Development Release Management 64
47 Troubleshooting64 471 Works Cited 64
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 65 51 Technical System Landscape 65
511 System Landscape65 512 Language Support 65 513 Proposed Components 66 514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 66
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis 66 521 Trace and Log Files 66 522 Database Monitors 68 523 Operating System Monitors68 524 Workload Monitors68 525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools 68 526 Interface Monitors 69 527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors 69 528 Software Component Monitors 69
53 Integration with CA Introscope 69 531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere 70 532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process 72 533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 73
54 Technical Monitoring 73 55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 74
6
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
551 Administration Tools of Software Components 74 552 Starting and Stopping 74
56 Backup and Restore 75 57 Classification 75 58 Backup and Restore 75 59 Periodic Tasks 76
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks 76 592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks 77
510 Logging On and Load Balancing 77 511 User Management 78
5111 User Management Tools 78 512 Printing 80 513 High Availability 80
5131 High Availability at Application Level 80 5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing 82 5133 High Availability at a Database Level 84
514 Transport and Change Management 85 515 Troubleshooting 85 516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore 86
6 Support Desk Management 89 61 Remote Support Setup 89 62 Problem Message Handover 89
7 Appendix 90 71 Related Guides 90
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
1 Getting Started
Caution
This guide does not replace the daily operations handbook that we recommend customers to create for
their specific production operations
11 About this Guide
This guide provides operations-related information for SAP POINT-OF-SALE (SAP POS) SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL1 (SDTR) and SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
The design implementation and optimized operation of your SAP POS application 24 hours a day has never been
more vital for your business success
This guide provides a starting point for managing your SAP POS application and maintaining and running it to its
full potential It contains specific information for various tasks and lists the tools that you can use to implement
the application
You can find documentation for SAP POS SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION along with this guide in the SAP Library under Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale
Target Groups
Technical Consultants
System Administrators
Solution Consultants
Business Process Owner
Support Specialist
12 Global Definitions
SAP POS Application
SAP POS represents a market view of groups of related business scenarios This delivery contains SAP POS
components that are essential for implementing all solution-related business scenarios processes and functions
Implementation knowledge is included with each solution
1 Formerly called SAP CENTRALIZED ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (SAP CEFT) which was known previously
as TRANSNET
8
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
Business Scenario
From a microeconomic perspective a business scenario is a cycle which consists of several different
interconnected logical processes in time Typically a business scenario includes several company departments
and involves with other business partners From a technical point of view a business scenario needs at lea st one
SAP application (SAP ERP SAP SCM or others) for each cycle and possibly other third-party systems A business
scenario is a unit which can be implemented separately and reflects the customerrsquos prospective course of
business
Component
A component is the smallest individual unit considered within the Solution Development Lifecycle components
are separately produced delivered installed and maintained
13 Important SAP Notes
Caution
Check regularly for updates available for the Application Operations Guide
Important SAP Notes
SAP Note
Number
Title Comment
1916385 SAP POS 23 RCA and Monitoring Guide Solution Manager Diagnostics and System
Monitoring
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Document History
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 3
Document History
Caution
Make sure you use the current version of the Application Operations Guide
The current version of the Application Operations Guide is at httpservicesapcominstguides on SAP Service
Marketplace
The following table provides an overview of the most important changes in prior versions
Version Change
10 First version for SAP POS 23
101 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP01
107 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP07
Changed document version to match SP07
Added a reference to SAP Note 1916385
Reorganized document sections to a new logical order
108 Updated for SAP POS 23 SP08 Modifiedadded the following sections
363 Backup and Restore
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
109 Moved content to the updated template
4
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Getting Started 7 11 About this Guide 7 12 Global Definitions 7 13 Important SAP Notes 8
2 Technical System Landscape 9 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix 9 22 Related Documentation 10
3 Store Components of SAP POS 12 31 Analysis Tools 12 32 Trace Files and Log Files 13
321 File Handler Configuration Section 13 322 Log Feature Configuration 14 323 Log File Format 15 324 POS Client Logging 15 325 Xpress Server Logging 17
33 Root Cause Analysis 20 331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool 20
34 Integration with CA Introscope 23 341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection 24 342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 27
35 Technical Monitoring 27 36 Management of SAP POS 27
361 Administration Tools of Software Components 27 362 Starting and Stopping 29 363 Backup and Restore 31 364 Periodic Tasks 33 365 Load Balancing 34 366 Management of Logon Data 34
37 High Availability 35 38 Software Change Management 36
381 Transport and Change Management 36 382 Development Requests and Development Release Management 37 383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation 37
39 Troubleshooting 37
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 39 41 Technical System Landscape 39
411 Graphic Landscape Description 39 412 Language Support 39 413 JVM Memory Settings 40 414 Database Monitoring 41 415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 46
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 5
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 47 42 Integration with CA Introscope 47
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server 48 422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client 50 423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 53
43 Technical Monitoring 53 44 Management 53
441 Administration Tools of Software Components 53 442 Disable Sample NTM Modules 54 443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL54 444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging 55 445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs 55 446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups 55 447 Page File 55 448 SQL Server Memory56 449 Logging to DB 58 4410 Starting and Stopping 58 4411 Backup and Restore 58 4412 Periodic Tasks 59 4413 Logging On and Load Balancing 59 4414 User Management62 4415 Printing 62
45 High Availability 62 46 Software Change Management 64
461 Transport and Change Management64 462 Development Request and Development Release Management 64
47 Troubleshooting64 471 Works Cited 64
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 65 51 Technical System Landscape 65
511 System Landscape65 512 Language Support 65 513 Proposed Components 66 514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 66
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis 66 521 Trace and Log Files 66 522 Database Monitors 68 523 Operating System Monitors68 524 Workload Monitors68 525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools 68 526 Interface Monitors 69 527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors 69 528 Software Component Monitors 69
53 Integration with CA Introscope 69 531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere 70 532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process 72 533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 73
54 Technical Monitoring 73 55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 74
6
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
551 Administration Tools of Software Components 74 552 Starting and Stopping 74
56 Backup and Restore 75 57 Classification 75 58 Backup and Restore 75 59 Periodic Tasks 76
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks 76 592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks 77
510 Logging On and Load Balancing 77 511 User Management 78
5111 User Management Tools 78 512 Printing 80 513 High Availability 80
5131 High Availability at Application Level 80 5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing 82 5133 High Availability at a Database Level 84
514 Transport and Change Management 85 515 Troubleshooting 85 516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore 86
6 Support Desk Management 89 61 Remote Support Setup 89 62 Problem Message Handover 89
7 Appendix 90 71 Related Guides 90
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
1 Getting Started
Caution
This guide does not replace the daily operations handbook that we recommend customers to create for
their specific production operations
11 About this Guide
This guide provides operations-related information for SAP POINT-OF-SALE (SAP POS) SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL1 (SDTR) and SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
The design implementation and optimized operation of your SAP POS application 24 hours a day has never been
more vital for your business success
This guide provides a starting point for managing your SAP POS application and maintaining and running it to its
full potential It contains specific information for various tasks and lists the tools that you can use to implement
the application
You can find documentation for SAP POS SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION along with this guide in the SAP Library under Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale
Target Groups
Technical Consultants
System Administrators
Solution Consultants
Business Process Owner
Support Specialist
12 Global Definitions
SAP POS Application
SAP POS represents a market view of groups of related business scenarios This delivery contains SAP POS
components that are essential for implementing all solution-related business scenarios processes and functions
Implementation knowledge is included with each solution
1 Formerly called SAP CENTRALIZED ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (SAP CEFT) which was known previously
as TRANSNET
8
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
Business Scenario
From a microeconomic perspective a business scenario is a cycle which consists of several different
interconnected logical processes in time Typically a business scenario includes several company departments
and involves with other business partners From a technical point of view a business scenario needs at lea st one
SAP application (SAP ERP SAP SCM or others) for each cycle and possibly other third-party systems A business
scenario is a unit which can be implemented separately and reflects the customerrsquos prospective course of
business
Component
A component is the smallest individual unit considered within the Solution Development Lifecycle components
are separately produced delivered installed and maintained
13 Important SAP Notes
Caution
Check regularly for updates available for the Application Operations Guide
Important SAP Notes
SAP Note
Number
Title Comment
1916385 SAP POS 23 RCA and Monitoring Guide Solution Manager Diagnostics and System
Monitoring
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
4
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Getting Started 7 11 About this Guide 7 12 Global Definitions 7 13 Important SAP Notes 8
2 Technical System Landscape 9 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix 9 22 Related Documentation 10
3 Store Components of SAP POS 12 31 Analysis Tools 12 32 Trace Files and Log Files 13
321 File Handler Configuration Section 13 322 Log Feature Configuration 14 323 Log File Format 15 324 POS Client Logging 15 325 Xpress Server Logging 17
33 Root Cause Analysis 20 331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool 20
34 Integration with CA Introscope 23 341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection 24 342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 27
35 Technical Monitoring 27 36 Management of SAP POS 27
361 Administration Tools of Software Components 27 362 Starting and Stopping 29 363 Backup and Restore 31 364 Periodic Tasks 33 365 Load Balancing 34 366 Management of Logon Data 34
37 High Availability 35 38 Software Change Management 36
381 Transport and Change Management 36 382 Development Requests and Development Release Management 37 383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation 37
39 Troubleshooting 37
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 39 41 Technical System Landscape 39
411 Graphic Landscape Description 39 412 Language Support 39 413 JVM Memory Settings 40 414 Database Monitoring 41 415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 46
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 5
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 47 42 Integration with CA Introscope 47
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server 48 422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client 50 423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 53
43 Technical Monitoring 53 44 Management 53
441 Administration Tools of Software Components 53 442 Disable Sample NTM Modules 54 443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL54 444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging 55 445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs 55 446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups 55 447 Page File 55 448 SQL Server Memory56 449 Logging to DB 58 4410 Starting and Stopping 58 4411 Backup and Restore 58 4412 Periodic Tasks 59 4413 Logging On and Load Balancing 59 4414 User Management62 4415 Printing 62
45 High Availability 62 46 Software Change Management 64
461 Transport and Change Management64 462 Development Request and Development Release Management 64
47 Troubleshooting64 471 Works Cited 64
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 65 51 Technical System Landscape 65
511 System Landscape65 512 Language Support 65 513 Proposed Components 66 514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 66
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis 66 521 Trace and Log Files 66 522 Database Monitors 68 523 Operating System Monitors68 524 Workload Monitors68 525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools 68 526 Interface Monitors 69 527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors 69 528 Software Component Monitors 69
53 Integration with CA Introscope 69 531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere 70 532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process 72 533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 73
54 Technical Monitoring 73 55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 74
6
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
551 Administration Tools of Software Components 74 552 Starting and Stopping 74
56 Backup and Restore 75 57 Classification 75 58 Backup and Restore 75 59 Periodic Tasks 76
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks 76 592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks 77
510 Logging On and Load Balancing 77 511 User Management 78
5111 User Management Tools 78 512 Printing 80 513 High Availability 80
5131 High Availability at Application Level 80 5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing 82 5133 High Availability at a Database Level 84
514 Transport and Change Management 85 515 Troubleshooting 85 516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore 86
6 Support Desk Management 89 61 Remote Support Setup 89 62 Problem Message Handover 89
7 Appendix 90 71 Related Guides 90
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
1 Getting Started
Caution
This guide does not replace the daily operations handbook that we recommend customers to create for
their specific production operations
11 About this Guide
This guide provides operations-related information for SAP POINT-OF-SALE (SAP POS) SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL1 (SDTR) and SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
The design implementation and optimized operation of your SAP POS application 24 hours a day has never been
more vital for your business success
This guide provides a starting point for managing your SAP POS application and maintaining and running it to its
full potential It contains specific information for various tasks and lists the tools that you can use to implement
the application
You can find documentation for SAP POS SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION along with this guide in the SAP Library under Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale
Target Groups
Technical Consultants
System Administrators
Solution Consultants
Business Process Owner
Support Specialist
12 Global Definitions
SAP POS Application
SAP POS represents a market view of groups of related business scenarios This delivery contains SAP POS
components that are essential for implementing all solution-related business scenarios processes and functions
Implementation knowledge is included with each solution
1 Formerly called SAP CENTRALIZED ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (SAP CEFT) which was known previously
as TRANSNET
8
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
Business Scenario
From a microeconomic perspective a business scenario is a cycle which consists of several different
interconnected logical processes in time Typically a business scenario includes several company departments
and involves with other business partners From a technical point of view a business scenario needs at lea st one
SAP application (SAP ERP SAP SCM or others) for each cycle and possibly other third-party systems A business
scenario is a unit which can be implemented separately and reflects the customerrsquos prospective course of
business
Component
A component is the smallest individual unit considered within the Solution Development Lifecycle components
are separately produced delivered installed and maintained
13 Important SAP Notes
Caution
Check regularly for updates available for the Application Operations Guide
Important SAP Notes
SAP Note
Number
Title Comment
1916385 SAP POS 23 RCA and Monitoring Guide Solution Manager Diagnostics and System
Monitoring
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 5
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later 47 42 Integration with CA Introscope 47
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server 48 422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client 50 423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 53
43 Technical Monitoring 53 44 Management 53
441 Administration Tools of Software Components 53 442 Disable Sample NTM Modules 54 443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL54 444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging 55 445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs 55 446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups 55 447 Page File 55 448 SQL Server Memory56 449 Logging to DB 58 4410 Starting and Stopping 58 4411 Backup and Restore 58 4412 Periodic Tasks 59 4413 Logging On and Load Balancing 59 4414 User Management62 4415 Printing 62
45 High Availability 62 46 Software Change Management 64
461 Transport and Change Management64 462 Development Request and Development Release Management 64
47 Troubleshooting64 471 Works Cited 64
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 65 51 Technical System Landscape 65
511 System Landscape65 512 Language Support 65 513 Proposed Components 66 514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 66
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis 66 521 Trace and Log Files 66 522 Database Monitors 68 523 Operating System Monitors68 524 Workload Monitors68 525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools 68 526 Interface Monitors 69 527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors 69 528 Software Component Monitors 69
53 Integration with CA Introscope 69 531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere 70 532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process 72 533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope 73
54 Technical Monitoring 73 55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION 74
6
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
551 Administration Tools of Software Components 74 552 Starting and Stopping 74
56 Backup and Restore 75 57 Classification 75 58 Backup and Restore 75 59 Periodic Tasks 76
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks 76 592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks 77
510 Logging On and Load Balancing 77 511 User Management 78
5111 User Management Tools 78 512 Printing 80 513 High Availability 80
5131 High Availability at Application Level 80 5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing 82 5133 High Availability at a Database Level 84
514 Transport and Change Management 85 515 Troubleshooting 85 516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore 86
6 Support Desk Management 89 61 Remote Support Setup 89 62 Problem Message Handover 89
7 Appendix 90 71 Related Guides 90
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
1 Getting Started
Caution
This guide does not replace the daily operations handbook that we recommend customers to create for
their specific production operations
11 About this Guide
This guide provides operations-related information for SAP POINT-OF-SALE (SAP POS) SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL1 (SDTR) and SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
The design implementation and optimized operation of your SAP POS application 24 hours a day has never been
more vital for your business success
This guide provides a starting point for managing your SAP POS application and maintaining and running it to its
full potential It contains specific information for various tasks and lists the tools that you can use to implement
the application
You can find documentation for SAP POS SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION along with this guide in the SAP Library under Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale
Target Groups
Technical Consultants
System Administrators
Solution Consultants
Business Process Owner
Support Specialist
12 Global Definitions
SAP POS Application
SAP POS represents a market view of groups of related business scenarios This delivery contains SAP POS
components that are essential for implementing all solution-related business scenarios processes and functions
Implementation knowledge is included with each solution
1 Formerly called SAP CENTRALIZED ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (SAP CEFT) which was known previously
as TRANSNET
8
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
Business Scenario
From a microeconomic perspective a business scenario is a cycle which consists of several different
interconnected logical processes in time Typically a business scenario includes several company departments
and involves with other business partners From a technical point of view a business scenario needs at lea st one
SAP application (SAP ERP SAP SCM or others) for each cycle and possibly other third-party systems A business
scenario is a unit which can be implemented separately and reflects the customerrsquos prospective course of
business
Component
A component is the smallest individual unit considered within the Solution Development Lifecycle components
are separately produced delivered installed and maintained
13 Important SAP Notes
Caution
Check regularly for updates available for the Application Operations Guide
Important SAP Notes
SAP Note
Number
Title Comment
1916385 SAP POS 23 RCA and Monitoring Guide Solution Manager Diagnostics and System
Monitoring
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
6
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Table of Contents
551 Administration Tools of Software Components 74 552 Starting and Stopping 74
56 Backup and Restore 75 57 Classification 75 58 Backup and Restore 75 59 Periodic Tasks 76
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks 76 592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks 77
510 Logging On and Load Balancing 77 511 User Management 78
5111 User Management Tools 78 512 Printing 80 513 High Availability 80
5131 High Availability at Application Level 80 5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing 82 5133 High Availability at a Database Level 84
514 Transport and Change Management 85 515 Troubleshooting 85 516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore 86
6 Support Desk Management 89 61 Remote Support Setup 89 62 Problem Message Handover 89
7 Appendix 90 71 Related Guides 90
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
1 Getting Started
Caution
This guide does not replace the daily operations handbook that we recommend customers to create for
their specific production operations
11 About this Guide
This guide provides operations-related information for SAP POINT-OF-SALE (SAP POS) SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL1 (SDTR) and SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
The design implementation and optimized operation of your SAP POS application 24 hours a day has never been
more vital for your business success
This guide provides a starting point for managing your SAP POS application and maintaining and running it to its
full potential It contains specific information for various tasks and lists the tools that you can use to implement
the application
You can find documentation for SAP POS SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION along with this guide in the SAP Library under Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale
Target Groups
Technical Consultants
System Administrators
Solution Consultants
Business Process Owner
Support Specialist
12 Global Definitions
SAP POS Application
SAP POS represents a market view of groups of related business scenarios This delivery contains SAP POS
components that are essential for implementing all solution-related business scenarios processes and functions
Implementation knowledge is included with each solution
1 Formerly called SAP CENTRALIZED ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (SAP CEFT) which was known previously
as TRANSNET
8
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
Business Scenario
From a microeconomic perspective a business scenario is a cycle which consists of several different
interconnected logical processes in time Typically a business scenario includes several company departments
and involves with other business partners From a technical point of view a business scenario needs at lea st one
SAP application (SAP ERP SAP SCM or others) for each cycle and possibly other third-party systems A business
scenario is a unit which can be implemented separately and reflects the customerrsquos prospective course of
business
Component
A component is the smallest individual unit considered within the Solution Development Lifecycle components
are separately produced delivered installed and maintained
13 Important SAP Notes
Caution
Check regularly for updates available for the Application Operations Guide
Important SAP Notes
SAP Note
Number
Title Comment
1916385 SAP POS 23 RCA and Monitoring Guide Solution Manager Diagnostics and System
Monitoring
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
1 Getting Started
Caution
This guide does not replace the daily operations handbook that we recommend customers to create for
their specific production operations
11 About this Guide
This guide provides operations-related information for SAP POINT-OF-SALE (SAP POS) SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL1 (SDTR) and SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
The design implementation and optimized operation of your SAP POS application 24 hours a day has never been
more vital for your business success
This guide provides a starting point for managing your SAP POS application and maintaining and running it to its
full potential It contains specific information for various tasks and lists the tools that you can use to implement
the application
You can find documentation for SAP POS SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION along with this guide in the SAP Library under Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale
Target Groups
Technical Consultants
System Administrators
Solution Consultants
Business Process Owner
Support Specialist
12 Global Definitions
SAP POS Application
SAP POS represents a market view of groups of related business scenarios This delivery contains SAP POS
components that are essential for implementing all solution-related business scenarios processes and functions
Implementation knowledge is included with each solution
1 Formerly called SAP CENTRALIZED ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (SAP CEFT) which was known previously
as TRANSNET
8
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
Business Scenario
From a microeconomic perspective a business scenario is a cycle which consists of several different
interconnected logical processes in time Typically a business scenario includes several company departments
and involves with other business partners From a technical point of view a business scenario needs at lea st one
SAP application (SAP ERP SAP SCM or others) for each cycle and possibly other third-party systems A business
scenario is a unit which can be implemented separately and reflects the customerrsquos prospective course of
business
Component
A component is the smallest individual unit considered within the Solution Development Lifecycle components
are separately produced delivered installed and maintained
13 Important SAP Notes
Caution
Check regularly for updates available for the Application Operations Guide
Important SAP Notes
SAP Note
Number
Title Comment
1916385 SAP POS 23 RCA and Monitoring Guide Solution Manager Diagnostics and System
Monitoring
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
8
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Getting Started
Business Scenario
From a microeconomic perspective a business scenario is a cycle which consists of several different
interconnected logical processes in time Typically a business scenario includes several company departments
and involves with other business partners From a technical point of view a business scenario needs at lea st one
SAP application (SAP ERP SAP SCM or others) for each cycle and possibly other third-party systems A business
scenario is a unit which can be implemented separately and reflects the customerrsquos prospective course of
business
Component
A component is the smallest individual unit considered within the Solution Development Lifecycle components
are separately produced delivered installed and maintained
13 Important SAP Notes
Caution
Check regularly for updates available for the Application Operations Guide
Important SAP Notes
SAP Note
Number
Title Comment
1916385 SAP POS 23 RCA and Monitoring Guide Solution Manager Diagnostics and System
Monitoring
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
2 Technical System Landscape
21 ScenarioComponent Matrix
1 SAP POS
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103 (Xpress Server)
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
10
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103 (optional)
o Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Server
i Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
o Instance SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110
i [Third- party SW Component] TPS NFM v22
o Instance Stored Value Server
i Software Component Stored Value Service 10
o Instance SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Server
i Software Component SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Service 27
ii Software Component Common Data Load 29
2 SAP POS Base
o Instance Mobile POS Device
i Software Component Mobile POS Client v103
o Instance POS Terminal
i Software Component POS Client v103
o Instance Store Server
i Software Component POS Server v103
ii Software Component Store Manager V103 (optional)
iii Software Component POS Client v103 (optional)
iv Software Component Mobile POS Server v103 (optional)
v Software Component SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL 110 (optional)
vi Software Component Electronic Journal Viewer v103 (optional)
vii Software Component Database Tools v103 (optional)
viii Software Component Store Configurator v103
Instance Store Configurator Server
i Software Component Store Configurator v103
ii Software Component Database Tools v103
For information on how various combinations of components can be installed toget her or on different pieces of
equipment see Determining Your Store Installation Architecture (Sample Installation Environments) in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
22 Related Documentation
The following table lists where you can find more information about the technical system landscape
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Technical System Landscape
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
Topic GuideTool Quick Link on SAP Service
Marketplace (servicesapcom)
Application- and Industry-specific
Components such as SAP Financials and
SAP Retail
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Technology Components such as SAP Web
Application Server
Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Sizing Quick Sizer Tool servicesapcomsizing
Technical Configuration Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Scalability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
High Availability Master Guide servicesapcominstguides
Security Security Map
Application Security Guide
servicesapcomsecurity
servicesapcominstguides
12
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
3 Store Components of SAP POS
This section is for components that are installed at the store and the components directly related to the
configuration of these components These are
POS Server (Xpress Server)
Store Manager
POS Client
Mobile POS Client
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database Tools
Head Office Component Store Configurator
31 Analysis Tools
The following table provides information on the tools
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
POS Client (Register
Application)
Desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
There is a Status window
that is normally blank A
short code appears if
there is an error
Manager code 6 Runs
communication
diagnostics at the
register
Manager code 900
Runs peripheral
diagnostics
Manager code 999
Shows the current
version and build
The NODB error code (no
database) appears in the
Status window if the
register is offline to the
POS Server The server
or the network is having
problems
POS ServerXpress Server Started by the
service when the PC
starts up
Can run a console
from the desktop to
monitor the server
At the bottom of the
console there is a
connection box that
shows the number of
registers currently
connected
If the server is not
running properly there
are errors reported in
The console application
can be used to identify a
number of problems with
the server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Monitor (Transaction Tool) StartPath Description Error Condition
the Log window
(xpslog)
LSN REPORT and
STATUS REPORT on the
console identify
technical problems
POS ManagerStore Manager
component
Started from the
desktop icon or from
the Windows Start
menu
At the bottom of this
application there are two
status flags Database
Connected and Server
Connected
If green the connections
are successful
If red the connections
have failed
Dbcheckexe Started in a
command line
window
This is a standalone
program that allows for
the integrity of b-tree
files to be validated
If POS is reporting a
corrupted b-tree
database this program
can be run to validate
the files
32 Trace Files and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Logging is configured via an ini file with a separate configuration file for each application (posLogini for POS
Client and xpsLogini for POS ServerXpress Server) These configuration files are located in the parm
directory and in the case of the POS application is handled in the same manner as other POS configuration files
(for example automatically copied and loaded from the Xpress Server as updates to the file are made)
The configuration file consists of two sections one section to configure log file attributes (FileHandler) and the
other to configure logging features (Logger) as described in the following sections
321 File Handler Configuration Section
The file handler configuration settings consist of
FileHandlerltIDgtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
ID An ID associated with the file handler used to associate logger features to file
handlers
Keyword One of pattern archive limit or count where
Pattern = log file name
Archive = truefalse flag indicating whether log files should be archived into
uploadlogs directory
14
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
FileHandler Constant Indicating a FileHandler Configuration Setting
Limit = number of log files to maintain (historical log files are appended with a
sequence number)
Setting Setting appropriate for keyword
A sample file handler to write log content to a xpslog file is as follows
FileHandlerFH1pattern=logsxpslog
FileHandlerFH1archive=true
FileHandlerFH1limit=500000
FileHandlerFH1count=5
Note
If archiving of a log file is enabled (Archive=true) then historical log files (up to a maximum of lsquoLimitrsquo) are
maintained in the uploadkeep0logs directory Additionally as part of POS terminal close processing
archived log files are transferred from the POS to the Xpress Serverrsquos uploadkeep0logs directory as
well When transferred to the Xpress Server the store number and terminal number is pre-pended to the
log file name
ltssssssgtltrrgtlogFileName
Where ltssssssgt is the store number (between 4 to 6 digits depending on configuration) and ltrrgt is the
register number Xpress Server logs use p5 as the value of ltrrgt
Example
If Store 3 (4 digit store numbers) is configured to archive the posclient log file then the log file from
terminal 3 will be transferred to the Xpress Server and given the name 000301posclientlog
322 Log Feature Configuration
Logging is based on features Each feature has its own log level and is associated with a file handler (to control
which log file the feature writes its log entries to) The logger feature configuration settings consist of
LoggerltFeatureNamegtltKeywordgt=ltSettinggt
Where
Logger Is a constant indicating a Logger configuration setting
FeatureName Is a well-known feature ID for which logging is to be generated
Keyword Is one of fileHandler displayToConsole or level where
fileHandler = a FileHandler ID used to associate a Logger to a File
Handler
displayToConsole = truefalse flag indicating whether log lines should be
displayed to a console (currently only valid for Xpress Server logging)
Level = log level associated with a feature one of SEVERE WARNING INFO
CONFIG FINE FINER or FINEST with FINEST generating the most detailed
logging
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Where
Setting Is the setting appropriate for a keyword
A sample xcpt log logger to write content to the xpslog file handler defined above is as follows
LoggerXCPTfileHandler=FH1
LoggerXCPTdisplayToConsole=true
LoggerXCPTlevel=INFO
323 Log File Format
All log lines written to log files have the same format They consist of
ltDategt ltSAP Thread IDWindows Thread IDgt ltLog Levelgt ltFeature NamegtltLog Entrygt
A sample EVENT log feature generated at an INFO level is as follows
Sep 16 103401 [14228c] [INFO] [EVENT] STARTUP
324 POS Client Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the POS with the default PosLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
SAPTXNOBJ
TXNCOMP
BROWSER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr posclientlog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
SAPTXNOBJ ndash SAP
Transaction Object
logging
TXNCOMP ndash SAP
Transaction Object
implementation logging
BROWSER ndash POS browser
logging
Level-based logging
from error (ERROR) to
diagnostic (FINEST)
PRINTER
DRAWER
MICR
MSR
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
LOCK
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr OPOSlog
POS OPOS device
logging with specific
feature name for each
device
Errors logged at ERROR
level
16
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
SCALE
SCANNER
FISCAL_PTR
PROMO
SERVICES
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr UElog
User exit logging PROMO
feature for Promotion
Engine User Exit logging
and SERVICES for
Services User Exit
logging
EFT_UE
EFT_IMP
PINPAD_UE
PINPAD_IMP
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr logs
rarr EFTlog
EFT User Exit logging
POS generated log
entries under _UE and
user exit implementation
generated log lines
under _IMP
Errors logged at ERROR
level
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr
rdatararr alleglog
To turn ON Allegiance
Message Logging use
regedit and navigate to
the following entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
|SOFTWARE|SAPrarr
Retail Systems rarr Point
of Sale
Create a new STRING
key called
AllegianceLogWindow
and set the string value
to 1 With this option set
the register application
creates a window that is
accessible on the
register and shows
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Restart the POS
application after setting
this option In addition
this option creates a file
called alleglog that
contains these
messages This file
wraps like other
standard log files and
message text is not
Allegiance messages to
and from SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
truncated
At End Of Day this file is
copied to the
cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory
ltsssssgtltrrgtalleglo
g
where ltssssssgt is the
store number and ltrrgt
is the register number
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
325 Xpress Server Logging
The following table provides information on the log files generated by the Xpress Server with the default
XpsLogini file
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
XCPT
EVENT
APPLY
XPS
APPLICATION
TRICKLE
COMMUNICATION
TLOG_UPLOADER
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr xpslog
XCPT ndash exception errors
and diagnostic logging
EVENT ndash for logging of
major store and terminal
state events
APPLY ndash reports the
files that have been
applied to the Xpress
Server It also includes
logging of files that are
applied at the register
Only primary download
files are logged
XPS ndash Xpress Server
diagnostic logging
APPLICATION ndash XPS
messaging related
diagnostic logging
TRICKLE ndash Tlog posting
from POS to Xpress
Server diagnostic
logging
COMMUNICATION ndash
Any errors that occur in
SAP POS appear here
18
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
POSXPS Server
communication
diagnostic logging
TLOG_UPLOADER ndash real
time trickle to head
office diagnostic logging
CRSRV Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr crsrvlog
The purpose of this log
file is to log credit debit
and some SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
messages for debug
purposes
This file contains
information about credit
debit and store value
card authorizations
Any credit or SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
communication errors
are reported here
SQL Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr logs
rarr sqllog
SQL diagnostic logging
Apply Master Data log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
ApplyBPMLog
A corresponding
trigger file
ApplyBPMTrg is
created after the
Apply process
finishes writing to
the log file
After master data is
transferred to a store it
is detected and applied
by the Xpress Server
This file logs the result
(SUCCESS or FAILURE)
of the Apply process for
each of the master data
files
A POSINI option
BPMAPPLYLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
ApplyBPMlog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
about the apply process
date and time stamp
store number filename
file size (bytes) result
(DONE or FAIL)
duration number of
records appliedrecord
number that caused the
failure
In case of failure the
following are logged
operation code
(addmodifydelete) of
the record that caused
the failure the PLUSKU
number (if present) of
the record that caused
the failure
EOD log file Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
This log file reports any
problems detected
during the EOD
Success and failure
statuses are logged
Reports the following
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 19
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
sdata rarr
EodBPMLog
(A corresponding
trigger file
EodBPMTrg is
created after the
EOD process finishes
writing to the log
file)
procedure
A POSINI option
BPMEODLOGFOLDER
allows you to specify the
folder where the
EodBPMLog file is
created No file is
generated if the setting
does not exist
about the EOD process
date and time stamp
store number EOD state
(STARTED
COMPLETED or
FAILED) duration of
EOD process (in
seconds)
Logging of Real Time Trickled
TLog
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CLOGYYYYMMDDT
XT
This file is created daily
and contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Turn on logging in the
Store Configurator rarr
Register Parameters rarr
Polling Options rarr Log
Messages checkbox
Contains TLog trickle
messages to SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Logging of Credit Messages to
Transnet
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata
Rltgtltsssssgtxml ndash
Credit Authorization
Responses from SAP
POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Sltgtltsssssgtxml -
Credit Request sent to
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
ltgt = register number
ltsssssgt = credit
sequence number
Credit Messages
tofrom SAP POS
STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
Not all
messages are
logged
Logging of Messages to SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Xpress Server rarr
sdata rarr
CRltgtxml and
rdataCCltgtxml
(Xpress Server PC)
Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Point of Sale rarr rdata
(Register PC)
CRltgtxml - Response
XML from SAP
RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
CCltgtxml - XML
request transmitted to
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
ltgt = the register
number
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
messages to and from
SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Only the last message
and response exists in
the directory
TWSecurity Logging Event Viewer under
Application
Errors that occur in the
TWSecurity module
20
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Logger Feature Path Description Error Condition
Store Manager Error Log Program Files rarr SAP
rarr Retail Systems rarr
Store Manager rarr
bkofferr
Any Store Manager
component crashes are
logged here
At EOD this file is copied
to the cXpress
Serveruploadkeep0
logs directory as
SSSSRRBKOFFERR
This is only copied if the
Store Manager
component resides on
the Xpress Server
33 Root Cause Analysis
331 Problem Analysis Using AppSight Troubleshooting Tool
Use Appsight for SAP Client Diagnostics to identify the root cause of poor client performance SAP POS setup
includes the optional installation of AppSight Service Black Box AppSight is a third-party monitoring tool used to
troubleshoot generic Windows applications
How AppSight Works
AppSight has two main parts The first part monitors all or particular applications running on a PC recording all
the details into a log file (asl) including screen shots user input program stack and other technical
information that help detect a problem You can install the recording part either as a regular application or as a
service To make the recording efficient and capture only the required application activity special recording
profiles are used (rpr)
The second part is a playback application that allows developers to play back the log file offline They can see the
details and the state of the program right before the critical error In addition to the log file debug files (such as
pdb and map) are required to obtain detailed information on an applicationrsquos internals AppSight playback
application requires an additional license and is typically only used by the SAP Support team
AppSight Installation Along with SAP POS
SAP POS installs only AppSight Service Black Box ndash an AppSight Windows service that does not require an
additional license The installation can be found with the SAP POS 103 installation package available at
servicesapcomswdc rarr Software Downloads rarr Software Download Center rarr Installations and Upgrades rarr
Browse our Download Catalog rarr Industry-specific Components rarr SAP POS
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
Once installed the service is configured to manually launch which ensures that it does not run at all times
thereby avoiding degrading system performance or bringing unnecessary overhead that is not immediately
required
SAP POS also installs recording profiles and helper batch files used for starting and stopping the service
For more information about AppSight Service Black Box installation along with SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-
Sale Installation Guide
AppSight Typical Use Case Scenario
The following is a scenario on how AppSight is used to troubleshoot a problem
The SAP POS application is installed on a target PC along with AppSight Service Black Box The application is
used on a daily basis while the service is stopped by default
At some point a user notices a critical error in the application performing a particular operation and contacts
the SAP support team
The support team uses the appropriate batch file to start the service with the corresponding recording profile
The support team advises the user to reproduce the issue or to continue normal operations until the error
reoccurs When the problem occurs again the user contacts the support team
The user stops the service using the batch file SAP provides and collects the recording log file for further
investigation along with additional binary and debug files from the application in question
The SAP customer representative uses the SAP Box service to transfer any large log files
Starting and Stopping of the AppSight Service
Along with each SAP POS application installed there is a shared component installed that includes SAP POS-
specific recording profiles as well as start and stop batch files
AppSight SAP POS specific files are installed to a fixed location ProgramFilesSAPRetail
SystemsAppSight
There are subfolders
Bin ndash contains StartAppSight batch files and util subfolder
Logs ndash recording log files folder where asl files are kept
RPR ndash AppSight profiles folder with rpr files
Recommendation
Do not start AppSight Service Black Box directly from the Control Panel Instead use the batch files from
the Bin folder This ensures that the service is started with the appropriate recording profile and that the
corresponding log file is stored in the Log folder so it can be easily located The Bin folder location is
added to the PATH environment variable so the batch files can be called from any location (including from
Windows Start rarr Run and command line windows)
The SAP support representative advises you on what batch file to use for each particular case
Use the StopAppSight batch file to stop the service and finalize the recording (You can start batch files by name
with or without specifying the bat extension)
The following table provides information on the batch files for AppSight
22
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Batch File Name Profile Used and
Applications Monitored
Created Log File Prefix
StartAppSight_POSGeneric POSGenericrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
poswexe
xpsexe
POSGeneric
StartAppSight_POSStoreAdministrat
ion
POSStoreAdministratio
nrpr
bkoffexe
journalexe
xpsctrlexe
POSStoreAdministration
StartAppSight_POSStoreStore
Configurator
POSStoreStore
Configuratorrpr
poscfgwexe
POSStoreStore
Configurator
StartAppSight_POSStoreOperations POSStoreOperationsrp
r
transnetexe
xpsexe
POSStoreOperations
StartAppSight_POSTerminal POSTerminalrpr
algexe
poswexe
TrvLPointsexe
POSTerminal
StopAppSight Stops the service
Log files Naming Convention
Recording rpr log files are named as follows
ltProfilePrefixgt_ltcomputernamegt_ltdategt_lttimegt_SEQltsequencenumbergtasl
where
ltProfilePrefixgt - prefix defined by profile used (see the table above)
ltcomputernamegt - PC name the service is running on
ltdategt - service launch date in format DDMMYY
lttimegt - service launch time in format HHMMSS
ltsequencenumbergt - number of the log file in the rotation sequence
Recommendation
There is a mechanism to rotate log files A maximum of 10 files is kept in a shared sequence produced
from all profiles A recording log file is overwritten once it becomes the 11th in the sequence of log files
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
created on a given PC If you need to keep previous version of the log files rename them before starting
the service
Starting the AppSight Service Remotely
To start the service remotely use the sc utility You need to specify the full path to a profile to be used and to an
output recording log file on the target PC as shown in the example below
sc computername start bbxservice rpr CProgram
FilesAppsightDataRPRSAPPOSrpr asl CProgram
FilesAppsightLogsPOSRecordingasl
where
bbxservice ndash AppSight Black Box service name in the system
computername -target PC name
rpr ltpathgt - a switch and path to a profile to be used by the service
asl ltpathgt - a switch and path to a log file to be created
Use quotes for long path names as shown in the example
Stopping the AppSight Service Remotely
sc ltcomputernamegt stop bbxservice
Sending Log Files to SAP Support
Once an issue is reproduced stop AppSight service using StopAppSight Locate the appropriate recording log file
in the ProgramFilesSAPRetail SystemsAppSightLogs folder
AppSight Service Best Practices
When the service is running ensure that users do not press RESET on the PC once the issue is encountered The
service has to first be stopped to allow putting all the recorded information safely into the log file
If AppSight service is running to monitor an issue on a PC and a user reboots the PC the service has to be started
again manually
34 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis Solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
Note
For more information on this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
24
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide on the Xpress Server machine
These agents must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Configure the introscpasc file with your monitoring options This configuration file will turn ONOFF data
collection for the components
5 At the registers specify the SMD Agent IP by running manager code 6 If no IP is provided the application
uses the IP address of the Xpress Server
341 INTROSCPASC Turn ONOFF Data Collection
To turn ONOFF data collection create or update the introscpasc according to the instructions in the file and
send this file to the store or stores along with the newparmtrg file Once this file is applied data collection is
active or inactive depending on the settings in the introscpasc file
To obtain the default copy of introscpasc copy the introscpirs file in the cProgram
FilesSAPRetail SystemsXpress Serverparm directory The irs file provides the current active
settings The irs file is provided in the default parameter set
The default parameters installed for Introscope have all reporting turned OFF
The default contents of introscpasc are as follows
Syntax
Control file for the Introscope instrumentation of SAP POS
(Xpress Server and POS applications)
Level of Instrumentation for metric collection and trace
collection
0 = NONE (no instrumentation)
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=0
1 = LOW (minimal instrumentation - recommended)
- Internal instrument levels 0-9
- NCS_CONF setting threshold_level_threshold=10
2 = MEDIUM (medium level of instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-19
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=20
3 = HIGH (maximum instrumentation)
- Internal instrument levels 0-29
- NCS_CONF threshold_level_threshold=30
Note that this file is renamed to introscpirs
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
For minimal performance impact recommended settings are
XPRESS SERVER=1
BACKUP SERVER=0
R=0
XPRESS SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP can be
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
XPRESS SERVER SMD IP=localHost
BACKUP SERVER=0 set to levels 0 1 2 or 3
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP can be
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=localHost or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer or
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=ip address specify ip address
of the SMD agent
Note that a change of SMD address requires this parm file
to be applied and an application restarted
BACKUP SERVER SMD IP=primaryServer
Register Specification
R=default level of instrumentation
(used if no register is specified)
R(register number)=level of instrumentation
R=0 sets the default level for register
R1=0 Register 1
R2=0 Register 2
To view Introscope status
Introscope Status can be displayed at the store as follows
26
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Xpress Server
Press Status Report on the Xpress Server console
The status message appears on the console
INTROSCOPE STATUS ON
INTROSCOPE LEVEL 10
INTROSCOPE SMD IP 106217199
POS - Register
Run manger code 8 or manager code 902 Communication Diagnostics then choose Introscope Status
This status indicates the status from instroscpasc It does not indicate whether or not the SMD agents are
running
Log Files
Log files written by the NCS library agent are given the same name as the system name plus _ncstrc and exist
in the POS or Xpress Servers program directories
Example
Cprogram filessapretail systemsXpress Server
STORE000003_ncstrc or
Cprogram filessapretail systemspoint of salerdata
STORE000003REG7_ncstrc
SMD Troubleshooting log files can be found in the following directories
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentlog
Look at most recent log file (for example SMDAgentApplicationltgtlog) The message Metric limit
exceeded stops collection Restart the agent
CusrsapDAASMDA97work
Metric Limits to Consider
Metric limits at a store have a default limit of 1000 metrics at one time Maximum instrumentation generates
about 50 metrics for the Xpress Server and 80 metrics for each register In addition the Enterprise Manager has a
limited total number of metrics across a chain The number 500000 is suggested for this implementation It is
not expected that all registers and all stores are instrumented at the same time
Functionality is instrumented according to an instrumentation level
NONE Not instrumented
LOW Minimal instrumentation (Recommended)
MEDIUM Medium instrumentation
HIGH Full instrumentation
Note
The LOW level provides all the necessary metrics to support Technical Monitoring
For minimal impact to performance the following setting for monitoring is recommended
XPRESS SERVER=1 lowest level
BACKUP SERVER=0 off
Commented [F1] I have asked Robins team for new limits
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
R=0 no register monitoring
342 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
35 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point
of-Sale rarr SAP POS 23rarr SAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
36 Management of SAP POS
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to technical administration and operation
361 Administration Tools of Software Components
The following table lists available administration tools
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Store Configurator Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator
POSINI Then select Technical Product Reference rarr POSini File
Directories and Parameters Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Rdata Sdata and Parameter
subdirectories
TLog Data Capture Formats
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr TLOG Data Capture Formats
Download File Formats
(Parameter File Download
Formats)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Download File Formats
28
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
TransactionTool Detailed Description
In the SAP Library select Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
SAP Point-of-Sale 103
Manager Code Reference Then select Head Office Functions rarr Store Configurator rarr Additional POS
Configuration Procedures Information rarr Manager Code Reference
SDK Reference
(Software Development Kit)
Then select Technical Product Reference rarr SDK Reference
See also the httpservicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr
Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale rarr SAP POS
23rarrSAP Point-of-Sale 23 SDK Technical Reference Guide
This Software Development Kit provides a programming level interface to
some aspects of the application (for example SKU and employee tables)
Backup Server Then select Technical Product Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup Server
rarr The Backup Server
Log Files
POS ServerXpress Server Log
This log file is a low level log file for the Xpress Server application
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr xpslog
This log file is in the log window of the POS Server console
Credit Log
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
crsrvlog
These logs contain data for credit transactions to an outside service
POS Client and Server Exception
and Event logs
These log files are low level log files
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Point of Sale rarr logs rarr xcptlog
and eventlog
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Xpress Server rarr logs rarr
xcptlog and eventlog
Log Files Viewable from the POS
Store Manager application
The following log files can be viewed from the POS Store Manager application
Applylog (log file for base parameter applies)
Xcptlog
Eventlog
(Main Menu rarr Administration rarr Log File)
Store Configurator
Program Files rarr SAP rarr Retail Systems rarr Store Configurator rarr convertlog
This file contains information about the conversion of parameter files If the
conversion fails this log file contains details about the conversion error
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
362 Starting and Stopping
Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Sequence Tool Detailed Description
Store Applications
Back Office Database 1 The back office
database can either
be Sybase or
Microsoft SQL
Standard database
processes apply
The back office
database must be
running for Xpress
Server or POS Store
Manager
applications to
work
Standard database
POS ServerXpress
Server
2 Xpress Server is
normally configured
as a Windows
service and can be
started or stopped
automatically or
using administrative
tools for Windows
The Xpress Server
application can also
be stopped by using
the Xpress Server
Console application
as well as
subsequently be
restarted This
console application
for the Xpress
Server can be run
from the desktop or
from the Windows
start menu Closing
the console
application does not
stop the POS Server
from running
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarrTechnical Product
Reference rarr Xpress Server and Backup
Server rarr The Backup Server See also
the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation
Guide
Although this application is generally
run before the register application it
does not have to be
30
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
POS Client 3 Each register can be
started at any time
The register uses
the Xpress Server to
provide information
The POS cannot
receive information
from the Xpress
Server unless the
Xpress Server is
running POS can be
started using the
desktop icon or by
using the Start
menu It can be
stopped by running
manager code 499
(Exit POS)
POS ManagerStore
Manager Application
3 The POS Store
Manager application
run after the back
office database and
Xpress Server
applications are
running
This application
does not run if the
database is not
running Several
functions do not run
if the POS Server is
not running If the
POS Server is
stopped while this
application is still
running this
application can be
reconnected using
the Main Menu rarr
Server State rarr
Attach function
otherwise this
application needs to
be stopped and
restarted
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 31
Software Component Start and Stop Sequences and Tools
Head Office Applications
Store Configurator 1 A Store
Configurator
database must be
installed
Start this
application from the
desktop icon or
from the Start
menu
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator
Electronic Journal Viewer
Database
1 The database runs
as part of a
database server It
starts and stops
from a service
Standard Sybase database
Electronic Journal Viewer
Application
2 This application
starts from the
desktop icon of the
Start menu The
journaldb
database must be
running when this is
started
See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale
rarr select the appropriate release of
SAP POS rarr Store and Back Office
Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Working with Journal
Files
363 Backup and Restore
You must back up your system landscape regularly to ensure that you can restore and recover it in case of failure
The backup and restore strategy for SAP POS consists of
Backup and restore coverage for each component (see the table below)
Cross-system data dependencies and handling
The backup and restore strategy for your system landscape should not only consider SAP systems but should
also be embedded in overall business requirements and incorporate your companyrsquos entire process flow
In addition the backup and restore strategy must cover disaster recovery processes such as the loss of a data
center through fire It is most important in this context that you ensure that backup devices are not lost together
with normal data storage (separation of storage locations)
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components that can be used to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and to easily
determine an appropriate backup method for this component The following table contains a component list for
your application and the appropriate Categories
32
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
POS ServerXpress Server Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Daily totals data
Back Office database
Parameter files
Back up database
daily after the end of
the day process
Back up Xpress
Server directories
sdata rdata and
parm
Keep all current
parameter downloads
available
Make available all
parameter file
updates done during
the day
SAP recommends
using a backup server
to ensure continued
service at the store if
the POS Server
machine has a hard
drive failure
Alternatively the
LOCAL PLU feature
can be used instead
of a backup server
With the LOCAL PLU
feature product data
and pricing is kept on
each register
In the event of a hard
drive failure
Install a new hard drive
containing the Xpress
Server image
Reset the store number
Copy saved sdata
rdata and parm
directories
Restore previous
eveningrsquos back office
database
Reapply any parameters
downloaded since the
previous backup
Start the POS Server
The application populates
all journal and transaction
files and rebuilds totals
data for the day
Store Configurator Store Configurator
database
Back up database or
keep a copy of the
database when
configuration
changes
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall
Store Configurator and
copy the backed up Store
Configurator database
Electronic Journal Viewer Journal database
Transaction files
(txn)
Journals (jrn)
Back up database
Back up all
transaction files and
journal files
In the event of a hard
drive failure reinstall the
Electronic Journal Viewer
restore the backed up
database and copy in all
of the journal and
transaction files
POS Client In the event of a hard
drive failure on a register
install a new hard drive
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Component Application Data Type Backup Method for
Application Data
Restore
containing the POS
image Start the register
run the Terminal Define
function (manager code
6) and the Peripheral
Setup function (manager
code 2) You can either
start a new register and
new daily transactions or
use the same original
register number If using
the same register
number run manager
code 420 (import
transaction files txn
and jrn from POS
Server) andor manager
code 422 (rebuild totals)
After setup this
application will download
parameters from the POS
Server and the register
Totals files will be rebuilt
364 Periodic Tasks
3641 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
This chapter describes all automatable tasks required to run periodically in order to keep the application running
smoothly over time Such tasks may be required on component level and are therefore relevant in each scenario
that uses the component You can find the mapping in 21 ScenarioComponent Matrix Other tasks may be
relevant for certain business scenarios only It is important that you monitor the successful execution of these
tasks on a regular basis
The EODPROCBAT file is a file that is executed on the Xpress Server to perform a number of tasks related to the
End Of Day process The retailer must create this file
Implement the following tasks
Back up the back office database after the end of the day This is usually done as part of the EODPROCBAT
Shut down the Xpress Server at the end of the day with a restart afterwards This is usually done as part of the
EODPROCBAT
Download daily parameters using the transport utility (for example SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL)
34
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Use the EODPROCBAT to copy files for the transport function andor use this batch file to perform a file clean-
up
Run the Tmxpurge utility to remove old data from the database This will ensure that the database will not get
too big See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarrTechnical Product Reference rarr Operating the Databases and Utilities rarr
Viewing and Validating Databases rarr Tmxpurge Utility for details
Upload all daily sales transaction files (txn) journal files (jrn) and total files This is the record of what
happened at the store during the day Copy all log files generated and keep them for future reference
Shut down the POS at the end of the day and then restart afterwards
Implement the database purge program to keep the database an acceptable size
Run scandisk and defragmentation on a regular basis
Run antivirus software
3642 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There are no required manual periodic tasks
365 Load Balancing
One POS ServerXpress Server can handle all registers at a store
366 Management of Logon Data
User Management Tools
Tool Detailed Description
Head Office Applications Carry out user management at the head office by creating an
empxtxnasc file containing all updates to employee
information at the store See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer
Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP Point-of-Sale rarr select the
appropriate release of SAP POS rarr Head Office Functions rarr
Store Configurator rarr Administration rarr Employee
POS ManagerStore Manager Application See httphelpsapcomrarr Customer Relationship Mgmt rarr SAP
Point-of-Sale rarr select the appropriate release of SAP POS rarr
Store and Back Office Functions rarr Store Manager rarr Store
Operations rarr Employee Management
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
37 High Availability
SAP POS is a Point-Of-Sale suite of products that runs in a retail store setting There are no centralized
components requiring high availability and the resiliency concept for the store components is built into the
product itself While you may opt not to use these high availability options in a typical deployment these are
employed in a manner that does not cause a single point of failure within the application
If you choose not to use the availability options included with the application t he following components could be
single points of failure
POS Server ndash This application is the store-level server for the POS terminals and POS ManagerStore
Manager Applications
Store Manager ndash This provides store reporting and other store back office support
Mobile POS Server ndash This provides business logic and data support for hand held mobile POS devices
Electronic Journal Viewer ndash This provides a view of the store transactions
All of these components run together on the store server The availability concept for the suite is covered by using
a backup store server For information on setting up a backup server see Setting Up a Backup Server in the SAP
Point-of-Sale Installation Guide Additionally the POS terminals which run the component POS Client may also
be fitted with their own local operational database to allow the selling activity to continue even if both store
servers or the store LAN fail
Components with single point of failure
Component Result Level of Impact
POS ServerXpress Server All selling activities are
blocked
Severe
Store Manager Store administrative
functions and reports are
blocked
Moderate to low
Mobile POS Server All mobile selling and
inventory management
functions are blocked
Low impact - tasks can be
performed at workstations
Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing transaction data or
receipts are blocked
Low
Each of the above components can be a single point of failure in this scenario In order to achieve high availability
(HA) for the complete scenario it is required that all components with single point of failures are setup with HA
All of the described functions can be distributed to a local backup store server In addition loss of the POS Server
can be mitigated by using a local database on each POS terminal
SAP POS provides this high availability option because these are mission-critical store systems Since load
balancing or other such data center oriented techniques do not apply to store systems support is built into and
delivered with the application
The following is an example of how users who are logged on and running transactions are affected in the event of a
system crash
36
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Crash of a POS Terminal
All the POS transactions are trickled to the SAP POS Server
If the POS terminal crashes (without a hard drive failure) it can continue working without any data loss once
the POS is restarted POS can reload the last transaction that was running during the crash from the POS
Server with the power failure mechanism
If the POS terminal crashes (with a hard drive failure) the POS can be reinstalled
Once the POS is started the transaction log can be restored with the RESTORE TERMINAL TLog function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
Using the transaction log at the SAP POS Server the totals can be rebuilt with the REBUILD TOTALS function
Refer to the Technical Product Reference section of the SAP Library for a detailed description
With the exception of an incomplete transaction that was running during the crash the POS can continue
running transactions without any data loss
Crash of Store Server Machine
After a crash (without a hard drive failure) once the SAP POS Server is started it will start trickling
transaction data from POS registers from the point of failure
If the store server crashes (with a hard drive failure) the set of applications installed must be reinstalled After
the POS Server is started it can receive trickle data (including data generated from before the crash) from
the POS registers
Additional required actions after a crash
Component Business Impact if Unavailable
POS Server Critical - employ backup store server option andor local POS
database on POS terminals
Store Manager Moderate
Mobile POS Server Low impact - employ backup store server option
Electronic Journal Viewer Low impact - employ backup store server option
38 Software Change Management
381 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS Change management requires a commitment to a SAP custom
development project and a consulting engagement resulting in a customer-specific code branch
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
382 Development Requests and Development Release Management
Once a support package is released the standard practice is for the client to install the new rele ase or upgrade in
a head office lab environment for configuration and testing In addition back -end processes need to be developed
to produce product files for the store system (for example SKU and Promotion files) Once parameters are
configured hardware peripherals set up network configuration completed and back-end processes put into
place you need to complete testing to ensure successful configuration and integration For instructions on
installing SAP POS see the SAP Point-of-Sale Installation Guide
SAP POS is released as a whole This is true for general releases and support packages Each release contains
builds of all SAP POS executables and components Many enhancements involve software changes to the
following and therefore need to be installed and upgraded
Store Configurator
Store Configurator database
POS Server
Back office database
POS
New installations can be done manually on each machine that requires the software Another common practice is
to create images of the POS Server PC and the point of sale device (register) PC These images are then copied to
the target machines at the store
Upgrades are done manually using the installation CD for each component (POS POS Server Databases
Database Tools Electronic Journal Viewer and Store Configurator) Another method of doing an upgrade is to
use the Unattended Upgrade feature For more information about the silent upgrade see Running an Unattended
Upgrade Process in the SAP Point-of-Sale Upgrade Guide
383 Support Packages and Patch Implementation
Support Packages contain a collection of error corrections They are released whole
39 Troubleshooting
POS Loses Communication with POS Server
If the POS loses communication to the POS Server you no longer have access to the transactions (for example
credit layaway lookup customer lookup)
Determine why the communication has failed Is the POS Server still running Are errors reported in the
xpslog Check the network Reboot the POS and POS Server
38
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Store Components of SAP POS
Peripheral Failures
Run manager code 900 and test peripheral functions Use the peripheral vendorrsquos diagnostic tools to determine
the problem Reconfigure the vendorrsquos hardware if necessary Install new hardware if the peripheral is faulty Run
manager code 2 to configure peripheral
Register Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive If the end of the day report is run before the problem is fixed you have to bypass the
register at the end of the-day
Parameter Files Do Not Become Active
Run manager code 414 to ensure that the parameters are moved to the register Stop the POS and the POS
Server and restart them
Download the parameter files again ensuring that the newparmtrg file is in the parm directory last
Xpress Server Hard Drive Failure
Replace the hard drive and follow the recovery instructions by your company
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
4 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
41 Technical System Landscape
411 Graphic Landscape Description
text
Tware GMXP5
TWare Enterprise
texttextXML
Socket
JMS
Connection
Java
Client
Connection
JMS
Connection
Message
ManagerXML
ISO
JMS
Connection
ISO SocketIP-
Based
IP-BasedIP-
Based
IP-
Based
Message Handler
TPS NTM
Java Client
text text
APM
APM
JMS
Connection
TPS server
connection
Message
Manager
APM
TPS NTM
Server
JMS Server
OR
OR
POS SystemSAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Client
(Store level)
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Server
(Head office or ASP)
412 Language Support
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in
North America
Problem
A problem related to TLog trickle store_1_TLogTrickleRouteERROR due to
javalangNullPointerException [2009-03-03
161916 CST]
A connection to the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION TLog trickle could not be
Connection start ERROR for
40
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Problem
established (could be that SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not running or
something else causing a connection error)
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsconnection
TNMessageConsumerConnection due to
comtriversitytransnetcoreTNException
to initialize adapter
comtriversitytransnetxtensionxreturn
ExpressReturnsTLogUploader [2009-03-05 110050
CST]
Problem log thread allocation warning Thread allocation WARNING multiple attempts(3)
needed for handler
comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandlerd41f3 [2009-03-03 162143
CST]
Problem log thread allocation failure Thread allocation ERROR no thread allocated for
handler comtriversitytransnetcoretmsmessage
TNXMLMessageHandler8b3bb3 [2009-03-03 162402
CST]
413 JVM Memory Settings
The following directly affects how JAVA (and subsequently SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL)
handles memory on the server By default JAVA uses up to a maximum of 64MB of memory Once that 64MB of
memory limit is reached (usually under high transaction volume) SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
may slow down considerably or stop responding all together
To adjust the JAVA memory setting edit the registry as follows
Note
These values may already have been set by an SAP Retail consultant It is possible that they may differ
from those below If they do we recommended that you consult with an SAP Retail consultant before you
change any values
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Library REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetjrebinse
rverjvmdll
JVM Option Count REG_DWORD 0x00000005(5)
JVM Number 0 REG_SZ -Dsunnetinetaddttl=0
JVM Number 1 REG_SZ -
Djavaclasspath=libt
ncorejartwsecurityjar
li
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
HKLMSystemCurrentControlSetServicesTransnetParameters
JVM Number 2 REG_SZ -
XX+ForceTimeHighResoluti
on
JVM Number 3 REG_SZ -Xms256M
JVM Number 4 REG_SZ -Xmx1024M
Path REG_SZ DProgram
Filestransnetbin
The most important settings are
Xms256M denotes the minimum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 256 denotes 256MB of memory
Xmx1024M denotes the maximum amount of memory allocated to JAVA The 1024 denotes 1024MB of
memory
Note
Make sure that the JVM Option Count and the JVM Option
Numbers added to the registry match that is if you have 5 JVM Option entries then the JVM Option
Count must be set to 5
414 Database Monitoring
4141 Database Table Layout
The following sections describe the database table layout
41411 SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Meter Table
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL meter table contains data on all transactions that SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL processes regardless of whether or not the transaction had a successful
delivery
The following are column headings with a description from the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
meter table
Id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server to
every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
serverId - contains the unique number assigned to each production SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL server This number identifies which SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server
processed the transaction
42
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
addedTime - contains the date and time stamp of when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received a transaction
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
clientInstanceId - not populated
txnType - numeric value identifying the transaction type
txnState - numeric value identifying the state of the transaction
externalProcessor - numeric value pulled from the EXTPROCESSORDESC table indicating which third-
party processor handled the transaction
clientRequestTime - not populated
requestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL received the
transaction from the store
externalRequestTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent
out the transaction to the third-party provider
externalResponseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
received the transaction back from the third party provider
responseTime - time value indicating when SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sent the
transaction back to the store
clientResponseTime - not populated
linkedId - not populated
41412 Payment Detail Table
The PAYMENT DETAIL table contains data on all successful transactions that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL processes The PAYMENT DETAIL table only contains information on financial transactions that were
successfully processed by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The following are column headings
with the description from the payment detail table
meter_id - contains a unique identifier assigned by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
server to every transaction handled by SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Chain - contains the clientrsquos chain ID
Store - contains the store number that initiated the transaction
Register - contains the store register number that initiated the transaction
Service - contains information on the processor that handled the transaction
tender_type - contains a numeric code for the tender type
card_type - contains information on the type of credit card used for the transaction
txn_ref_num - numeric value assigned by a third-party provider
txn_time - time the transaction occurred in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
txn_num - not populated
txn_type - contains a numeric code for the transaction type
txn_modifier - not populated
card_input_mode - not populated
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
card_holder_presence - not populated
card_holder_auth_method - not populated
card_holder_auth_entity card_num - not populated
card_num - contains encrypted card number data
card_expiry - contains encrypted card expiration data
Amount - dollar amount of the transaction
Cashback - not populated
action_code approval_code - numeric code passed from third party
Status - not populated
txn_timeUTC - transaction time value
Supplemental - not populated
4142 Sample SQL Queries to Monitor SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Envision SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is like a square where every corner represents a
time stamp from a transaction
Corner 1 Transaction from the store to SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Column name
requesttime
Corner 2 Transaction leaving SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and going to a third-party
provider Column name externalrequesttime
Corner 3 Transaction response coming back from a third-party provider Column name
externalresponsetime
Corner 4 Transaction response going back to the store level POS Column name responsetime
With each time stamp we can calculate total round trip times of a transaction or find the amount of time a
transaction took at a specific stage inside SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
If a transaction is not passed along the path in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL a 0 (zero)
appears in the portion of the database indicating the phase (as shown below) that was expecting to
receive a transaction hand-off That is if a transaction is not sent out to the third-party a (0) zero
appears under the requesttime column
44
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase1 rarr TXN into SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Phase2 TXN out to Provider rarr
Store POS
1 2
SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL
4 3
Third Party Provider
Phase4 TXN out to Store ltmdash Phase 3 TXN in from Provider ltmdash
With basic SQL knowledge we can then execute queries against the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL database that assist in troubleshooting if any slowdowns occur
Example
Calculating Transaction Times
----- Total TXNs ------
select count () from transnet_meter
where addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Round Trip ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime - requesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime - externalrequesttime gt 2500
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime - externalresponsetime gt 2500
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
Example
Calculating Failed Txns
----Failures in Transnet Phase I ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalrequesttime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that Transnet did not send the transaction to a third-party
---- Total Time in Transnet Phase II ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where externalresponsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
The following code indicates that the third-party did not send a response back in the allotted time frame
----Total Time in Transnet Phase III ----
select count () from transnet_meter
where responsetime = 0
and addedtime gt 2006-01-04 060000000 and addedtime lt 2006-01-04
130000000
Note
The items in italics are configurable and time in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is always
expressed in milliseconds
4143 Automating SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Database Monitoring
Since SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses a Microsoft SQL 2008 database it can be easily
incorporated into third-party monitoring systems that allow for monitoring of applications via SQL queries
One of the methods for the monitoring of SQL databases in real time is through the use of SQL XML services for
IIS This is a reference to assist in the configuration of SQL XML via IIS
46
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
You gain access to MS SQL Server (2005 +) XML data via IIS (5 +) Virtual Directories The following steps show
you how to set up a Virtual Directory via the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in IIS Virtual Directory
Management for SQL Server
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Right-click on the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 In the General tab set the Virtual Directory Name and Local Path to the Virtual Directorys IIS root folder (this
can remain the default wwwroot folder)
4 Set security options in the Security tab
Note
If you set up security so that the local IIS IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is used for MS SQL Server
access first make sure that the COMPUTERNAMEIUSR_COMPUTERNAME account is set up for access to
the specified database in MS SQL Server This type of security configuration is necessary if you want an
ASPNET Web Form to have access to the Virtual Directory (as the ASPNET Web Form typically runs
under the context of the local IUSR_COMPUTERNAME account)
5 In the Data Source tab set the name of the MS SQL Server containing the data you want to extract Then set
the Database field to the name of the database containing the data you want to extract
6 In the Settings tab make appropriate settings
7 Choose OK to save your changes
The Virtual Directory in the MMC console is visible
415 Extracting Data via HTTP URLs with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have setup a Virtual Directorys Settings tab to allow for URL queries below is the general syntax for
constructing such a URL
Syntax
Without XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltXM
LRootNodeNamegt
With XSLT transformation
httpltIISComputerNamegt[port]ltVirtualDirectoryNamegtsql=ltSelectQuerygtampRoot=ltX
MLRootNodeNamegtampxsl=ltXSLTFileNamegt
Example of an XSLT formatted URL
httplocalhostMSSQLNorthwindsql=SELECT2020FROM20Employees20FOR20XML20
AUTOampRoot=Employeesampxsl=MSSQLNorthwindEmployeesxsl
Where
[ ] Brackets indicate the value is optional
ltIISComputerNamegt - is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was
set up
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
ltVirtualDirectoryNamegt - is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS
server
ltSelectQuerygt - is any T-SQL formatted SELECT statement with the appended FOR
XML AUTO clause
For example SELECT FROM Employees FOR XML AUTO
o ltXMLRootNodegt - is the parentroot node of the XML document extracted
o ltXSLTFileNamegt - is the URL path to an XSLT transformation file to be applied
to the extracted XML data
416 Extracting Data via Template Queries with Internet Explorer 5 and Later
If you have set up Settings on the Virtual Directory tab to allow for template queries you can use XML-based
template files instead of URLs to extract data from MS SQL Server
Note
This is useful if you want to hide the details of a SELECT statement and other elements
1 Open the IIS Virtual Directory Management for SQL Server MMC span-in
2 Select the Default Web Site (or the Web Site name) for the IIS computer and then choose NewVirtual
Directory
3 Select the Virtual Directory that you want to set up a Virtual Template Directory for
4 Select the Virtual Names tab
5 Create a Virtual Name of Type template and set the Path to where the template files are located
6 Choose Save
7 Choose OK to save your changes
If you have a Virtual Directory named MSSQLNorthwind and created a Virtual Template Directory named
template that is hosted on the same machine as the MS SQL Server instance then you would extract the MS SQL
Server data from a template XML file with the following URL
httpltlocalhostgtltMSSQLNorthwindgttemplateAllEmployeesxml
Where
ltlocalhostgt is the name of the server where the Virtual Directory was set up
ltMSSQLNorthwindgt is the name of the Virtual Directory setup on the IIS server
lttemplategt is the name of the Virtual Template Directory setup via the Virtual Names tab on the IIS server
42 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution The current
implementation is with Solution Manager 71
48
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following are required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide These
agents must be running
2 They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and select Start)
3 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Run Managed System Setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
5 Enable CA Introscope
421 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Server
1 Locate the Introscope agent files directory
For example for Introscope 82xx
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
For example for Introscope 91x
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip(for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x)
This creates another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
or
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
3 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred to as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily and in the current landscape it is Cwily_transnet
4 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 49
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName
to the host name in lower case letters
o cayyztnsbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the right Instrumentation packages Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set these entries for Transnet locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Server
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
5 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt For more information refer to the
details below
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o Javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomlwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpr
ofile
o Dcomwily introscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
6 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy sap_ext_eposjar attached to SAP Note 1916385 and replace it with the one under
ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
7 Restart Transnet Service
8 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
50
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications You should
assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by the
ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Server
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
422 Enable CA Introscope for Transnet Client
1 Extract the introscope-transnet-setupzip file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar
2 Edit the batch file introscope_transnet_setupbat for the following properties These setup parameter
variables must be configured correctly before the batch is executed The following values are just examples
o SET SOL_MAN_HOST=DEWDFGWD00537WDFSAPCORP
o SET SOL_MAN_PORT=6001
o SET JAVA_HOME=Program FilesJavajdk170_25
o SET INTROSCOPE_TRANSNET_DRIVE_LETTER=C
3 Execute the batch program introscope_transnet_setupbat which will execute the steps below from
Step 4 to Step 7 Once this batch process is successfully executed go to Step 8 ndash update SAP POS Introscope
instrumentation
Locate the Introscope agent files directory For example
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
4 Copy the file wilybcaj5_915xxzip to a temporary directory and unzip it to a directory named
introscope_transnet under drive property value set above in the batch file For example
Cintroscope_transnet
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 51
5 In the rest of the setup instructions the above path is referred as ltAGENT_HOMEgt In case of manual
installation of CA Introscope ltAGENT_HOMEgt is the folder where CA Introscope is installed Typically it is
usrsapccmswily
6 Set Introscope agent connection properties
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgentprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcphostDEFAULT
o Set the value to the host name (or IP address) of the machine where Enterprise Manager resides
o dewdfgwd00537wdfsapcorp
o Locate the property introscopeagententerprisemanagertransporttcpportDEFAULT
o Set the value to the port on which the Enterprise Manager listens for Agent connections
o The default value for that property is 6001
o If the host name is not in lower case letters locate and set the property introscopeagenthostName to
the host name in lower case letters
o cayyzssbpos23
o SAP Solution Manager requires all host names to be reported in lower case letters
o Choose the correct instrumentation packages for SAP POS Locate property
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-Specific jar file (sap_retailjar)
to the end of the property values
o introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile=sap_typicaljar sap_retailjar
o Set the following properties for Transnet Client For example locate and enable the following properties
o introscopeagentcustomProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=SAP Transnet Client
o Save the changes to the agentrsquos profile
7 Activate Introscope agent by setting Java VM parameters To activate the Introscope agent for a Transnet
process add the following additional Java VM parameters to the registry
o Open your registry and locate the following directory
o HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARETriversityJavaStartupTransnet
o Modify the property VirtualMachineArgs to add the following parameters
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 8
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAME
Note
Once the Introscope agent is upgraded the configuration store path is changed as given below
On Java 5 and Introscope agent 9
o javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfileltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgentpro
file
o Dcom wilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
52
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Example
Java VM parameters
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=Cwily_transnetIntroscopeAgentprofile -
javaagentCwily_transnetAgentjar -
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=Transnet
8 Update SAP POS Introscope instrumentation
o Extract the SAP_Retail_Instrumenationzip attached to SAP Note 1916385 This zip file is included
in the attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar copy the extracted file
sap_retailjar and replace it with the one under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o Copy the sap_ext_eposjar file attached to SAP Note 1916385 This jar file is included in the
attachment named SAP_Note_1916385-CA_Introscope_Contentrar and replace it with the one
under ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreext
9 Restart Transnet Service
10 Validate the activation of Introscope agent
o Go to the log folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for the configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_ltAGENT_NAMEgtlog For example AutoProbeTransnetlog
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that
the Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope
clients and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set
by the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) Follow the instructions and naming conventions
precisely
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
Note
To disable CA Introscope Transnet Client
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
o javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgentprofile
o DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 53
423 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service Marketplace
43 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguidesrarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guidesrarr SAP for Retailrarr SAP Point of-Sale
rarr SAP POS 23rarrSAP POS 23 Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference on the SAP Service
Marketplace
44 Management
441 Administration Tools of Software Components
Store Server
HOStore Server
POS
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re)
NT
M C
lien
t A
PI (J
ava
)
NTM
Server
NT
M S
erv
er
AP
I (J
NI)
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SA
P P
OS
Sto
re D
ata
Tra
nsfe
r fo
r R
eta
il
(Co
re) Service
Provider
DB
Frontend (Web container)
RRRR
TCPIPTCPIP
Windows
Named Pipes
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing (being done by the primary and
secondary servers) For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation Guide
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface is a Web-based application that serves as a system
administration center You perform administrative tasks such as how to set up users task definitions and audit
schedules
54
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
442 Disable Sample NTM Modules
Disable any sample APMs that run on the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server These APMs are
installed by default and can be disabled without adverse However leaving these APMs running takes away
resources from SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
This may already have been taken care of by an SAP Retail consultant
To do this in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
1 Choose System rarrModule rarrModule Properties
2 Remove auto start from all modules except SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Note
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL may not have auto-start enabled Depending on the
version of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL it may be defined as a windows service rather
than a module
443 Increase Minimum Thread Count for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
In the config directory of the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL install there is a file called
transnetxml This file contains the configuration information that controls how SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL operates when starting up and routing messages
The configuration for minimum thread count is at the bottom of this file
ltThreadPool
Name=TransnetThreadPool
Debug=false
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumThreads=30 gt
Depending on the volume of traffic and connections made by stores you may want to increase the minimum
thread count from its initial default value (5) to at least 30 for servers that handle more than 100 stores with
volumes that could exceed 10 tps at peak
Note
You can monitor thread count using Windows Task Manager and viewing the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL process (make sure you have selected thread count in the Task Manager under
View rarr Select Column)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 55
444 Disable NTM Transaction Logging
Verify that the NTM Transaction Logging option is disabled on all servers To do this open the NTM module and
choose System rarr Server rarr Server Properties
From the menu select Transnet Once selected ensure that the following are not checked
Diagnostic Logging
Verbose Output
Disable Routing Messages
445 Increase Preserved NTM Server Logs
To troubleshoot a SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server effectively there are circumstances in
which SAP needs to involve TPS Systems TPS Systems is the group that developed the low-level messaging
engine used in SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If they become involved in resolving a SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL issue they require NTM server logs By default when SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is installed the NTM server logging is set to capture a maximum of two log files
with a maximum log size of 1024 MB This setting is too low when trying to determine the cause of an issue that
arose several days ago
To change this setting from the NTM Manager screens choose System rarr NTM Manager
Select Log Daemon and change the log size to 10 MB and the number of backups also to 10 This enables TPS to
look at issues that have occurred in the past several days
446 Disable Client Reverse DNS Lookups
Add a G to the Additional Parameters field in the server configuration This disables Client DNS reverse lookups
upon connecting to the server Currently these lookups cause an approximate two-second delay on each initial
store connection each time the server is reset
Note
Only the first connection per store is affected
447 Page File
Ensure that the paging file size is set correctly in Windows
The page file is a special file used by windows for holding temporary data that is swapped in and out of physical
memory to provide a larger virtual memory set
The file name is pagefilesys and it is created during setup in the root of the boot drive as a hidden file It does
not show up on an Explorer file listing unless you toggle off the Hide System Files option In its default state the
page file should be approximately 15 times the system RAM
56
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
A page file can be individually set for each drive by the following
1 On the desktop right click My Computer
2 Choose Properties
3 Select the Advanced tab
4 Choose Performance Options
5 Choose Change
The Virtual Memory screen appears
You can now select the drive from the provided list and then type in the amount of memory you want dedicated to
the swap file in the provided text boxes A box is provided for the initial size and the maximum size Enter the
amount and choose Set
Note
Using the same value for the initial and maximum size improves performance and reduces fragmentation
448 SQL Server Memory
4481 Systems Configured on Windows 2000Windows NT 40Windows 2008 Servers
SQL by default is set to use all available memory dynamically This can cause problems for high volume as SQL
could contend for resources that SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL needs
To change the memory in SQL
1 Go to SQL Enterprise Manager
2 Right-click on the SQL server that stores the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
3 Under Dynamic Memory Settings select Properties and adjust the settings accordingly
Note
In MS SQL Server 2008 Dynamic Memory is referred to as Other Memory
Note
For most SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL systems SAP recommends that you set the
minimum value to 350MB and the maximum value to be 1024MB
If you are using any of the following then the Advanced Windowing Extensions AWE enabled option should always
be left to the default value of 0 which means that the AWE memory is not being used
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 (any version) or
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition under Windows NT 40 or Windows 2000 Server or
if your server has 4GB or less of RAM
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 57
4482 Systems Configured on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
The AWE Application Programming Interface (API) allows applications (that are written to use the AWE API) to
run under Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Windows 2000 Datacenter Server to access more than 4GB of
RAM SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition (not SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition) is AWE-enabled and can take
advantage of RAM in a server over 4GB If the operating system is Windows 2000 Advanced Server SQL Server
2005 Enterprise Edition can use up to 8GB of RAM If the operating system is Windows 2000 Datacenter Server
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise can use up to 64GB of RAM
By default if a physical server has more than 4GB of RAM Windows 2000 (Advanced and Datacenter) along with
SQL Server 2005 Enterprise Edition cannot access any RAM greater than 4GB Exactly how you configure AWE
memory support depends on how much RAM your server has To configure Windows 2000 (Advanced or
Datacenter) you must enter one of the following switches in the boot line of the bootini file and reboot the server
4GB RAM 3GB (AWE support is not used)
8GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB RAM 3GB PAE
16GB + RAM PAE
The 3GB switch is used to tell the SQL Server to consume 3GB out of the 4GB of RAM available natively If you do
not specify this option then SQL Server takes advantage of only the 2GB of the first 4GB of RAM in the server not
effectively utilizing 1GB of RAM
Once this step is done the next step is to set the AWE enabled option to 1 within SQL Server Enterprise Edition
and then restart the SQL Server service Now SQL Server is able to use the additional RAM in the server
Using a query window pointed to the SQL server you are working with execute the following
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE show advanced options 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
SP_CONFIGURE awe enabled 1
RECONFIGURE
GO
Caution
When using the AWE enabled setting after it is turned on the SQL Server no longer dynamically manages
memory and takes the entire available RAM (except for 128MB that is left for the operating system)
instead If you want to prevent SQL Server from taking the entire RAM you must set the Max Server
Memory option
Syntax
SP_CONFIGURE max server memory 4096 (Note 4096 is just an example)
RECONFIGURE
GO
58
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
449 Logging to DB
In the transnetxml file you will find the following setting
ltDatabase type=rdbms
Driver =cominettdsTdsDriver
Url=jdbcinetdae710100861433transnet15gt
ltConnectionPool
Debug=false
Name = TransnetJDBCPool
CleaningIntervalSeconds=60
MinimumConnections=1
MaximumConnections=10
ConnectionLifeSeconds=1800
MaximumUseCount=25 gt
ltDatabasegt
Ensure that the correct IP address the port that SQL is listening to and the database that SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL uses is set correctly
To validate if SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is logging to SQL run a POS transaction against
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL and then run the following query against the SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
Select from transnet_meter
where addedtime gtlt07142005 111651 AMgt
Adjust the time and data parameters to correspond with the transaction that just ran
If logging is not successful check logtxt from the log directory for errors related to SQL connectivity
Following the above steps can eliminate potential issues that may cause slowdowns or unresponsiveness in SAP
POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL during times of peak activity
4410 Starting and Stopping
There are specific instructions for starting programs and resources such as clients APIs and servers Similarly
there are specific instructions for stopping resources For more information see the SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Installation Guide
4411 Backup and Restore
The backup and restore procedures can be applied to the system with the working windows registry for SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL If the windows registry entries for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL are broken the user should reinstall the software and then follow the restore steps
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 59
Note
There is no online backup available for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL The user is
expected to stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services before backup The steps
do not cover the backup and restore for any third-party components used by SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL such as JAVA Environment MS SQL Server BouncyCastle JDBC driver
Backup
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the directory where the application was initially
installed to a backup location
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database and copy the SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database from the installed location to a backup location
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
Restore
1 Stop all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
2 Copy the backup from the backup directory to the CProgram FilesSAPTransnet directory or the
directory where the application is initially installed
3 Detach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database copy the backup SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database into the location it is installed and overwrite the existing files
4 Attach the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL database
5 Start all SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services
4412 Periodic Tasks
There are no periodic tasks that are defined for all customers
Each electronic funds transfer (EFT) providerclient implementation has its own way of doing reconciliation and
settlement This involves comparing TLogs from SAP POS with the EFT providersrsquo equivalent of TLogs but this is
done outside of SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL While SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL does have the ability to load TLogs and EFT providersrsquo TLogs so they can be compared it is up to the
customer to decide how frequently the load process is done
4413 Logging On and Load Balancing
44131 Logging On
To access the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL interface
1 On the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server (or any computer with Internet access) start
your Internet browser program (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer)
60
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
2 Go to the Internet address of the computer on which you have installed SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER
FOR RETAIL (ask your system administrator for the IP address or bookmark)
The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL sign-in page appears
3 Enter your user logon information To do this
o In User ID type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL user name
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
o In Password type your unique SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL password
Note
If you do not know or have forgotten your user identifier contact your system administrator This field is
case sensitive
Caution
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL comes with a single default user called Administrator
which uses the accompanying password admin This allows initial access to the system When you first
set up your system administrator should assign unique user identifiers and passwords to each person
who uses the system Users should change their password the first time they log into the system
4 Choose Login
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL main menu page appears From this page you can access all
of the administrative reporting and configuration subsystems available
You can access the configuration interfaces for both File Transfer and the Centralized Electronic Funds
Transfer components depending on which services you have installed by choosing the relevant menu
buttons on the main menu page
Note
When accessed from this interface the File Transfer and Centralized Electronic Funds Transfer
Configuration Interfaces appear in a secondary browser window following the logon process To run them
you must keep both the original and the secondary browser windows running
44132 Load Balancing
To service greater transaction throughput than can be handled by a single server SAP POS STORE DATA
TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can use multiple servers linked to a load balancer at the front end A load balancer is a
server that allocates requests among multiple servers to equalize the loads handled by each server
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 61
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
In-store POS System
R
Xpress Server
SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail
TPS Client
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
TPS Server TPS Server
Load Balancer
SAP POS Store Data Transfer
for Retail Server
MS SQL Server
Database
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)TCPIP (SSL)
Primary HO System Secondary HO System
Although each SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server can write to its own database this presents
a problem for features such as transaction reporting that require that all transactions for a given query be within
the same database For example if a reversal is not in the same database as the transaction it is reversing the
query would have to run against both databases and then be merged for an accurate report SAP POS STORE
DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL servers connected to a given load balancer can alleviate this extra work by writing
to the appropriate database
The optimal topology for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL services dedicates a server for the data
load and SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Administration module (for reporting) to ensure that
data intensive operations do not interfere with online transaction processing being done by the primary and
secondary servers Information is written to the database asynchronously with respect to transaction processing
in the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Adapter Module Therefore even if the database server
becomes busy with a report transaction processing is not affected and all data is eventually written into the
repository
The use of a Storage Area Network (SAN) provides the greatest data input output (IO) rates the most significant
physical redundancy (leveraging a RAID configuration) and the flexibility to expand storage as the need arises
The SAN should be configured with RAID level 5 for data and RAID level 1 for MS SQL logs
The minimal topology for the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service involves two servers a
primary and secondary
62
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
Reporting and data loading should not be executed during periods of high volume and preferably not at all during
store operating hours
4414 User Management
The user management feature provides a central space in which you can maintain detailed informat ion and
security profiles for each of your users You can
Create new user profiles
Assign user names
Assign and modify passwords
Enter and modify personal information (for example contact information)
Define and modify user scope privileges (that is specify the chains stores and registers for which data is
available to this user)
Define and modify security clearance information
4415 Printing
Logging in to the user interface opens the SAP Centralized EFT Welcome window from which you can access the
print options via the File menu The options are
Print Report ndash generate a report for the screen you are currently in Not all windows allow you to print a report
Print Screen ndash print the current screen (only the viewable area shown)
45 High Availability
The SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Adapter modules are stateless the architecture of the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL Service can be characterized as a service-oriented architecture (SOA)
This allows for a relatively simple yet robust application-level high availability implementation (see also the
diagram in 510 Logging On and Load Balancing The SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL site client is
responsible for directing requests to the primary server unless the primary server fails to accept a connection or
respond within a configurable amount of time If there is a service interruption on the primary server the client
reverts to the secondary server until the primary comes back online Comprehensive internal design ensures that
there are no missed or duplicate transactions when these server redirections happen The failover and failback is
invisible to the POS operator and completely automated
Most service providers support multiple access points and most of the APMs in the library incorporate support for
multiple service provider access points ensuring that even failures at the service provider do not interrupt service
at the registers
The following diagram depicts a possible technicallogical system landscape which addresses the SAP POS
STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL high-availability and scalability aspects (illustrating these concepts at all
tiers of the system deployment)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 63
64
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
46 Software Change Management
461 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement and results in a customer -
specific code branch
462 Development Request and Development Release Management
There is an installation image created with every software build which is considered as a one entity component
There is no facility to modify code at the customer site
47 Troubleshooting
For more information see the Troubleshooting section in the SAP POS Store Data Transfer for Retail Installation
Guide
471 Works Cited
1) Microsoft Corporation (1997) MS Cluster Server Administrators Guide
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetarchivewinntasproddocsdefaultmspx
2) SQL Server Performance (2001) Setting Up SQL in a Clustered Environment
Retrieved January 5 2006 from httpwwwsql-server-performancecom
3) Microsoft Corporation (2000) Server Cluster Troubleshooting
Retrieved January 5 2006 from
httpwwwmicrosoftcomtechnetprodtechnolwindowsserver2003libraryServerHelp549145e
4-4f5d-4545-a9b5-53ebd86d7591mspx
4) Michael G (2005) Adding Microsoft SQL Server 2000 (and later) XML Support via IIS 5
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 65
5 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
51 Technical System Landscape
511 System Landscape
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized transaction service that authorizes item returns and refund
transactions requested from the SAP POS SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is typically deployed at the head
office of the retailer and provides service to SAP POS across all stores SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR
RETAIL is required to connect SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a Java EE application that is currently running on IBM WebSphere The
following diagram shows integration of all involved SAP components
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Register
Register
Express Server
JEE Engine
WebSphere
Head Office
Returns Authorization
SAP SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail
SAP POS
StoreSAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
SAP POS Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
CDL
DBSQL
ServerWeb Client
R
R
R
R
R
R
512 Language Support
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support Unicode Support is only available in English in North America
66
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
513 Proposed Components
Proper versions of applications are required to ensure successful system integration Check with your SAP
consultant regarding the supported versions of the following applications
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP POS
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL
514 System Requirements for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
See the SAP Returns Authorization Installation Guide
52 Monitoring and Tools for Problem and Performance Analysis
521 Trace and Log Files
Trace files and log files are essential for analyzing problems
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
WebSphere
SystemErrlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemErrlog
WebSphere system error
log
WebSphere system error
message and description
WebSphere
SystemOutlog
ltWebSphere
Homegtprofilesltpro
filenamegtlogsltSer
ver
NamegtSystemOutlog
WebSphere System
Output Log
WebSphere Log
Enginelogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsengine
logxx
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION engine
log
Important message or
error description for
engine and trickle
LoadLoglogxx ltRA Install
rootgtExpressReturn
sCorelogsloadLog
logxx
Or
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION batch
data loading log
Important message or
error description for
batch data loading
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 67
Trace and Log files Path Description Major Content
ltCDL install
rootgtlogsloadLog
log
Important Log and Trace Files
Content File
TIMINGAUTHORIZEREQUESTxx milliseconds
Return service performance
Enginelogxx
- Parsing transaction completed successfully
- Time elapsed for parsing (sec) xxx
Trickle service performance
Enginelogxx
- SEVERE comtriversitytefcoretlogparserInfoSetHandler -
Invalid format hellip
This generally indicates TLog parsing configuration is not correct You need to verify
the TLog format with SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION TLog parsing configuration
core2-5xml
Enginelogxx
Any TWSecurity related error message for example bad padding mode
This indicates that the encryption key does not match between SAP POS and SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility is an incorrect parsing configuration SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is trying to decrypt a message that is not encrypted
Enginelogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadSkuFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadSkuFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure SKU loading performance
Loadloglogxx
- LoadFiles executing task LoadStoreFile
- LoadFiles successfully executed task LoadStoreFile
Time between above two messages is used to measure STORE loading
performance
Loadloglogxx
- Parse executing task ParseTLog
- Parsing TLog file completed successfully
Time between above two messages is used to measure TLog parsing (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage BulkLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage BulkLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure bulk load (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- Process executing task ProcessTLog
- Process successfully executed task ProcessTLog
Time between above two messages is used to measure post bulk load (one major
Loadloglogxx
68
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Content File
step of data loading) performance
- pipeline executing stage DataPurge
- pipeline successfully executed stage DataPurge
Time between above two messages is used to measure db purge (one major step of
data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
- pipeline executing stage LowPriceLoad
- pipeline successfully executed stage LowPriceLoad
Time between above two messages is used to measure low price load (one major
step of data loading) performance
Loadloglogxx
522 Database Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for database monitoring In addition to the
logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor-specific
database monitoring problems
523 Operating System Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide specific tools for Operating System monitoring In addition to
the logging support available within the application you can use Microsoft tools to troubleshoot other vendor -
specific operating system problems
524 Workload Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide workload monitoring
525 Other Important Problem Analysis Tools
In general SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION relies on monitor or analysis tools provided by platforms such as
the operating system the application server and the database It does not provide a monitoring or analysis tool
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 69
526 Interface Monitors
Interface monitors are essential for analyzing problems with interfaces such as RFC IDoc and HTTP
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION interfaces with other components via RMI or JMS It relies on monitoring or
analysis tools provided by platforms such as operating system application server and database It does not
provide monitoring or analysis tools
527 Data Growth and Data Archiving Monitors
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not provide a tool to monitor data growth It relies on the database server
to monitor data growth Inside of the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION database TLog is the fastest growth data
It is fed into the database through the TLog trickle service or batch data loading process
However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION internally has a process to purge data automatically including TLog
data Database purge is one step of nightly batch data loading process It purges data that is out of date This is a
step automatically completed every night
For periodic tasks required to contain data growth (that is to reorganize temporary data) refer to 59 Periodic
Tasks
528 Software Component Monitors
Monitors for the technical components are essential for analyzing problems
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on SAP standard platform and does not utilize CCMS as a
monitoring tool It relies on tools provided by the operating system application server and database to monitor
53 Integration with CA Introscope
Integration with CA Introscope is part of the End-to-End Root Cause Analysis solution
Note
For more information about this tool see httpservicesapcomdiagnostics
To provide this monitoring the following is required
1 Install the SMD agents as described in the SAP Returns Authorization 27 Installation Guide These agents
must be running
They are started by using the All Programs rarr SAP Management Console (select Console Root rarr SAP Systems
rarr DAA right mouse click and choose Start)
2 Register with SLD (System Landscape Directory) using the Data Supplier Refer to SAP Note 1916385
3 Run managed system setup in the Solution Manager Refer to SAP Note 1916385
4 Enable CA Introscope
CA Introscope-Enabling IBM WebSphere
70
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CA Introscope-Enabling Batch Load Process
531 CA Introscope - Enabling IBM WebSphere
1 Locate the CA Introscope agent files directory
for Introscope 82xx version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwily
for Introscope 91x version
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwilybcaj5
_9150xxWily
2 Unzip ISAGENT8240-xxzip (for 824x) or ISAGENT9150-xxzip(for 915x) This creates
another Wily subdirectory
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicationwily4java
_8240xxwilyISAGENT8240-xxwily
OR
CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplication
wilybcaj5_915xxwilyISAGENT915xxwily
This directory is referred to as the Introscope agent files directory In the remaining instructions
ltAGENT_HOMEgt refers to this directory Substitute the actual directory accordingly
3 Set Agent connection properties
For IBM WebSphere Application Server SAP delivers the default Agent profile in the
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile file This file contains some SAP-Specific settings required for
IBM WebSphere Application Server The agent profile file contains different properties You have to specify
the connections properties to the Enterprise Manager All other settings can usually remain to the default
values
Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o For IS agent 9 ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfig
o For IS agent 8 ltAGENT_HOMEgt
To configure the CA Introscope Agent update the following properties to
IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
Property Value
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcphostDEFAULT=
Fully qualified host name of the Wily Enterprise Manager
server (for example usphlags06phlsapcorp)
introscopeagententerprisemanagertran
sporttcpportDEFAULT=
Port number on which the Wily Enterprise Manager
listens for Agent connections The default value is 6001
introscopeagenthostName= SAP Solution Manager requires all host names of the
Introscope Agent to be reported in small letters
If the host name is not in small letters locate and set
this property to the host name in small letters
introscopeagentcustomProcessName= Set these entries for WebSphere
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 71
Property Value
introscopeagentdefaultProcessName=
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile= Choose the Right Instrumentation Packages following
package is used for IBM WebSphere by default
introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile =
sap_typicaljarsap_websphere_typicaljar
This instrumentation package covers standard J2EE
functionalities (eg Servlets databaseJDBC web
services threads etc) Another instrumentation
package for WebSphere is the sap_websphere_fulljar
file It covers the same functionality but more in detail
Please use this file only if detailed analysis is needed Do
not specify both typical and full together
4 Activate CA Introscope Agent
Set Java VM parameters
To activate the CA Introscope Agent for a WebSphere application server you have to add the following additional
Java VM options
On CA Introscope agent 8
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer to the note below for details
On CA Introscope agent 9
javaagent ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_webspher
eprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt Refer note below for details
You can use WebSphere Administratorrsquos UI Integration Solutions Console to specify Java VM parameters for IBM
WebSphere application server as follows
1 Go to Servers rarr Server Types rarr WebSphere Application servers and select the server that you want to
modify For example Server1
2 From the menu on the right side choose Server Infrastructure rarr Java and Process Management rarr Process
Definition rarr Additional Properties rarr Java Virtual Machine
3 Specify new Java VM parameters in the Generic JVM Arguments field
Example
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationsco
msapsmdagentapplicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT824
0-2012-06-26wilyIntroscopeAgent_ websphereprofile ndash
javaagentCusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentapplicat
ionwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wilyAgentjar ndashDcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName= RASERVERNode01Cell
_RASERVERNode01_server1
72
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Note
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
-javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtcoreconfigIntroscopeAgent_websp
hereprofile
-DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
4 Restart WebSphere
5 Validate the activation
o Go to the logs folder under ltAGENT_HOMEgtlogs
o Make sure that a log file for configured Introscope Agent exists The name of the log files are
o IntroscopeAgent_sap_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
o AutoProbe_WebSphereltAGENT_NAMEgtlog
The Agent Name
Each Java Agent running in your Introscope environment has a name whether you assigned one explicitly
configured a method of automatically assigning a name or simply started up an instrumented application that the
Java Agent monitors
The Java Agent name is important because it is central to many views and presentations in the Introscope clients
and it is the key to the process of associating monitoring logic with target applications
You should assign a unique name to each Introscope Agent running in your landscape The agent name is set by
the ltAGENT_NAMEgt Java VM parameter (see above) SAP Solution Manager requires following agent naming
convention to be applied to WebSphere Application Server systems
ltAGENT_NAMEgt=ltCELL _NAMEgt_ltNODE_NAMEgt_ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt
ltCELL_NAMEgt - the name of the WebSphere CELL for example RASERVERNode01Cell
lt NODE_NAMEgt - the name of WebSphere Node of the application server like RASERVERNode01
ltAPP_SERVER_NAMEgt - name of WebSphere application server like server1
AGENT_NAME = RASERVERNode01Cell _RASERVERNode01_server1
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming conventions otherwise the associated monitoring logic will not
work
532 CA Introscope - Enabling Batch Load Process
1 Update CA Introscope Agent Profile
o Go to ltAGENT_HOMEgt
o Open the agentrsquos profile IntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
o Locate property introscopeautoprobedirectivesFile and append the POS-specific jar file
(sap_retailjar) to the end of the property values
2 Edit the CDL batch file
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 73
o Go to ltCDL_HOMEgt
For example CProgram FilesSAPReturnsAuthorizationDataloadSAP_POS
o Open the batch file pipelinebat
o Append CA Introscope parameters to the java command
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
javaagent =ltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
o ltAGENT_HOMEgt=CusrsapDAASMDA97SMDAgentapplicationscomsapsmdagentap
plicationwily4java_824020120626135042wilyISAGENT8240-2012-06-
26wily [for Introscope version 82x]
o ltAGENT_NAMEgt= A unique name to associate the CDL batch process CDL_Batch
Note
It is important to follow the agent naming convention for agents otherwise the associated monitoring
logic will not work
o Save the file
Note
Disable CA Introscope in Batch Load Process
Remove the following options from the JVM arguments (Java Virtual Machine Arguments) to disable the
CA Introscope agent
javaagentltAGENT_HOMEgtAgentjar
DcomwilyintroscopeagentProfile=ltAGENT_HOMEgtIntroscopeAgent_websphereprofile
DcomwilyintroscopeagentagentName=ltAGENT_NAMEgt
533 Interpreting Performance Nodes Displayed by Introscope
For additional information on the individual nodes reported by the workstation see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
54 Technical Monitoring
For Alert Event and Exception monitoring see
servicesapcominstguides rarr Industry Solutionsrarr Industry Solution Guides rarr SAP for Retail rarr SAP Point-of-
Sale rarr SAP POS 23 rarr Technical Monitoring and Introscope Technical Reference Guide on the SAP Service
Marketplace
74
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
55 Management of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP provides you with an infrastructure to help your technical support consultants and system administrators
effectively manage all SAP components and complete all tasks related to middleware technology
551 Administration Tools of Software Components
The management of the system falls into four categories
Operating system (OS0 - Windows Server)
Database (MS SQL Server 2008)
Application server (IBM WebSphere V7)
SAP applications
The OS database and application server have their own management consoles or tools to manage those parts of
the system For administration of these parts refer to the product related guides from their respective vendors
TransactionTool Detailed Description
IBM WebSphere admin console
and command line tools
To start stop and monitor WebSphere application server
MS SQL Server Enterprise
Manager and related tools
To start stop and monitor MS SQL Server
552 Starting and Stopping
The following commands outline various administration-level processes that can be performed
Command Detailed Description
startServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to start the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically launched upon starting the
WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
stopServercmd ltserver
namegt
This is an IBM WebSphere tool to stop the IBM WebSphere server SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is automatically stopped with the stopping of
the WebSphere server
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltWebSphereRootgtbin
Pipelinebat This is the tool to start the batch data loading of SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
Run this command from the command window under directory
ltRA rootgtExpressReturnsCoreDataload
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 75
Command Detailed Description
Once the process is complete the application exits automatically
Start admin UI To start admin UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION perform these steps
1 Open the Web browser and type the URL httpltRA server
namegt9080ExpressReturnsWebRefundLoginjsp
2 Enter the user name and password If you do not know your user name or
forgot the password contact your system administrator or SAP customer
support
3 Select Login
The main menu appears
4 To stop the admin UI
a) Choose Connect from the main menu
b) Choose LoginLogout
56 Backup and Restore
Based on the type of application data contained in a component we have introduced a categorization scheme for
system components You can use this schema to analyze the backup requirements of any system component and
to easily determine an appropriate backup method for this component
57 Classification
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION contains application data There are several types of application data in the
system
Application configurations - either residing directly on the file system or some configurations are packaged
inside the JEE installable package
TLog archives passed from SAP POS every night
Application logs
Application data in database (MS SQL Server 2008)
58 Backup and Restore
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION backup and restore strategy fails over to category VII from 516 Categories of
System Components for Backup and Restore as follows
76
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
VII Original application data standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not based on SAP WebAS
Data
Database and log backup
Backup of software
Configuration
Log files
Below are some backup and restore recommendations regarding the above data types
Application configurations
Since some configurations are included inside the JEE installable package you may want to back up the entire
returns authorization installation directory each time the installation or configuration changes
Backup and restore is file system based See the MS Windows 2003 Administrator Guide for detailed steps
Archive TLog from SAP POS every night
SAP POS pass the TLog archive to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION every night for batch data loading The
archive is on the file system and after batch data load it is normally left under the directory ltdata loading
rootgtstorage
It is suggested to back up these archives daily For either troubleshooting or in case database restore is not
possible the backup can be used to restore TLog data
Application Logs
Application logs can be found under the directory ltRA installation rootgtlogs Logs can be useful for
trouble shooting Backup and restore can be performed directly on file system level
The application serverrsquos log can be considered in this scope as well The application serverrsquos log can be found
under the directory ltApplication server rootgtAppServerprofilesltprofile
namegtlogsltserver namegt
This type of data is not critical which means that data loss does not impact the functioning of the business but
may create difficulty in troubleshooting Customers can define their own backuprestore strategy for application
logs
Application Data in the Database
Application data in the database is critical for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Minimum data loss and quick
data restoration is highly desired
Therefore we recommend that you do a full database backup each week In addition we recommend that you do
a transaction log backup every night after batch data loading You may also want to consider full backups plus
differential backups based on your management strategy
59 Periodic Tasks
591 Scheduled Periodic Tasks
We recommend that you schedule the batch data loading process according to your needs Batch data loading
can be started by a command line tool This batch download looks into the data directory to pick up the TLog and
then follows the preconfigured steps to process TLogs and other tasks (based on configuration)
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 77
Recommendation
As this process creates a heavy load on the database we suggest that you run the batch data loading
process outside of your normal business hours
StandardHousekeeping Jobs
Program name Task Program name Task Program name Task
Batch data loading process
pipelinebat
Once per day SAP recommends that you
schedule this task once per day
and after normal business hours
592 Required Manual Periodic Tasks
There is no manual periodic task
510 Logging On and Load Balancing
The following describes the return and trickle services
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
Return service Return service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a stateless session
bean This service can be load
balanced but ensure that
configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
Not applicable
Trickle service Trickle service is deployed on the
JEE engine as a message driven
bean (MDB) It is an
asynchronous service and
processes JMS messages
This service can be load
balanced but you need to ensure
Not applicable
78
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Services Detailed Description Prerequisites
that configuration files on all load
balancing nodes are the same
All load balancing nodes have to
access the same database
instance This means that the
database should be centralized
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is a centralized service All data
is kept in a centralized
transaction database no
replication exists
511 User Management
5111 User Management Tools
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not run on the standard SAP platform so it does not utilize any SAP user
management tools However SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has a built-in user management tool which is
accessible from its Web Admin UI and can be used to manage any UI users
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 79
The SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION user management tool is only open to the administrator
Tool Detailed Description Prerequisites
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI
You can use this tool to manage
all users that access the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Admin UI Customer can perform
the functions user search add
edit and delete via this tool
This tool is only accessible to the
administrator
To access this tool
Open the Web browser and enter
the URL
httplthostnamegtltportgt
ExpressReturnsWebRefundL
oginjsp
Choose Administration rarr User
Maintenance
There are three levels of
permissions that can be granted
to users
Cashier - users with this
permission can only access store
functions such as transaction
search and customer
maintenance
Manager - users with this
permission can access Store
Functions and Reports but have
no access to administrative
tasks such as user maintenance
and other system parameters
maintenance
Administrator - users with this
permission can access all
functions from the Admin UI
User data is kept in the SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
database SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is not a
distributed system and no data
replication exists
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
is installed and running
User
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
Admin User admin is the default user Not applicable
80
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
User Detailed Description Single Sign-On
with the SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION installation
and has Administrator
permissions
Single sign-on is not supported in
SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION
512 Printing
There is no printing in SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Typically SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a backend
service that has no printing requirement However it is possible to print while using the administrator user
interface This printing is dependent on the browser
513 High Availability
While implementing high availability for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION you must consider high availability for
both the application and its database This approach gives you the flexibility to choose from different high
availability strategies for the application and database and eventually build a complete solution for the entire
system
Currently application high availability is supported by the application itself and the application server High
availability of the database is fully supported by the vendor
5131 High Availability at Application Level
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION has two proven high availability implementations namely failover and load
balancing
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Failover
The following diagram shows the high availability implementation of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION failover In
this case high availability is supported by the SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL server which is
located at the head office
In this approach there are two SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers or instances set up in head office
Primary instance
Backup instance
Both servers (instances) are configured identically and connect to the same database
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL can be configured to deal with two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION instances It normally directs all requests to the primary instance However whenever any
problem occurs SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL has the capability to redirect all requests to the
backup instance for failover
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 81
MS SOL
Server
Returns Authorization
Primary Server
Returns Authorization
Backup Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Server
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
POS SAP Store Data
Transfer for Retail Client
Express Server
RegisterRegister
Head Office
Store 1 Store N
SAP POSSAP POS
SAP SAP POS Store
Data Transfer for Retail
Returns Authorization
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
In the failover model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL is configured to support high availability as
well as to improve reliability of the entire system
However there are two disadvantages in this model that need to be considered while choosing proper high
availability implementation for a customer
There is no load balancing in this configuration which means that though there are two SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION servers or instances configured it cannot handle a higher load than one server can The
reason for this is that there is only one server or instance used at any given time The backup server or
instance is on standby and only becomes active when the primary server or instance encounters a problem
Trickle service is not covered by this high availability implementation This means that when control switches
from a primary to a backup server or instance trickle service is not switched on The reason for this is that
SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL only supports one destination for trickle and does not
provide failover
However trickle can be corrected by CDL which loads all TLogs during the storersquos nightly process thus
preventing data loss The following impact on business should be noted
82
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION rejects same day returns since it cannot find the TLog from its database
The TLog goes to the database by CDL during the stores nightly process SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
processes the return request the following day
Though same day return is not supported by SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in this case SAP POS has the
capability to override and perform a manual return by the store manager
Web UI of SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION does not support automatic switchover which means that when
switchover happens the user has to manually switch to point to the backup server to user Web UI
Note
Though there are drawbacks listed above in the failover model it is still a valid and acceptable solution as
it provides high availability to return service It is also easy to set up and manage
5132 SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION Load Balancing
The following diagram shows how the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION load balancing model works In this
configuration SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL does not connect to SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION directly Instead it sends all requests to the load balancer and the load balancer redirects the
requests to different SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers based on their load level and availability
To avoid single point of failure in this model SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL should be configured
to support high availability The database should also be configured to support high availability as described later
in this guide
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 83
This approach provides some benefits as compared to the failover model
Full high availability is supported Not only for return service but it is also supported by the Web UI and trickle
service
Increased capability to handle more requests Both SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers are running
concurrently and share the load which means higher loads can be handled
Note
Although Web UI is covered in this high availability approach the UI session is not synchronized between
multiple SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION servers So when the load balancer switches servers the user
may have to log in again to set up a session
84
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
5133 High Availability at a Database Level
Database high availability is critical to the entire system Failover clustering is a solution provided by Microsoft to
ensure high availability of the database system Failover clustering is a process in which the operating system and
SQL Server 2008 work together to provide availability in the event of
Application failure
Hardware failure
Operating system error
Failover clustering provides hardware redundancy through a configuration in which mission critical resources are
automatically transferred from a failing machine to an identically configured server The following diagram shows
the high level overview of failover clustering
Below are high level descriptions about how it works
Virtual Server Virtual server is how a client views the cluster No matter how a cluster is implemented it hides
all details from the client What the client sees is a single server with its own unique server name and IP
address that is called virtual server The client works only with virtual server and does not need to identify
which node in the cluster it connects to
The client always accesses the virtual server through an external or public network
Heartbeat Heartbeat works in a private network which is set up only between the nodes The purpose of
Heartbeat is to check whether a server is up and running This occurs at regular intervals If the Heartbeat is
not functioning a failover is initiated and another node in the cluster takes over the services
Shared Disk Array The shared disk array is a collection of physical disks that is accessed by the cluster
However there is only one node in the clusterrsquos disk array at any given moment All other nodes are denied
access until they own the resource This protects the data from being overwritten when two computers have
access to the same drives simultaneously
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 85
514 Transport and Change Management
There are no transport processes for SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL changes This requires
commitment to an SAP custom development project and a consulting engagement which results in a customer-
specific code branch
515 Troubleshooting
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION troubleshooting majorly falls into three areas authorization engine trickle
service and batch data loading
Note
Trickle is always covered by the batch data loading process The advantage of trickle is that the TLog
posting is in real time However if trickle stops working it does not cause any data loss The TLog is
loaded by batch data loading typically after business hours
All troubleshooting activities rely on application logs Below are some typical problems found from our ramp -up
customers
EncryptionDecryption Problem SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION is a centralized service in the SAP POS
landscape Some information exchanged between SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS are
encrypted for example credit card numbers To make sure the communication is successful both SAP
RETURNS AUTHORIZATION and SAP POS must share the same encryption key
If you see any code GeneralTWSecurityException in enginelog this most likely indicates an encryption
key mismatch between two systems To solve this problem export the encryption key from SAP POS and
import it to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Another possibility for this error is that the parsing configuration for either trickle or CDL is incorrect It is
trying to parse and decrypt some information that is not encrypted To solve this problem we need to verify
the TLog format definition from SAP POS and compare it with the parsing configuration
Connection pool issue The connection pool sometimes exhausts during peak load In this case there should
be a message in the enginelog to state No Connection If this happens we recommend increasing the
connection pool size This can be done through the WebSphere admin console
Repeating trickle message or incomplete trickle message The trickle service repeatedly processes same
message and throw exception There are factors that can cause this problem
o WebSphere JMS retry times
o Need to check settings of WebSphere JMS retry times We recommend that you limit retry to three times
o SAP POS STORE DATA TRANSFER FOR RETAIL translates TLog (trickle request) into a wrong format in
certain instances
The following scenarios should no longer occur as they have been fixed in the system
o The TLog message has a leading 0 (zero) and it create difficulty for SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION to
process
SAP POS repeatedly sends a trickle message to SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION in certain condition
Check the SAP POS log to make sure it is not repeating the trickle message
JMS Monitoring Monitor the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue (dead letter queue) periodically
as this is the only way to identify any issues at an early stage
86
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
This monitoring can be done via the WebSphere administrative console The most important thing to check is
the number of messages in the trickle JMS queue and system exception queue
If you see messages accumulating in the trickle message queue refer to the above Repeating trickle message
or incomplete trickle message section above You need to regularly monitor the system exception queue
Ideally there should be no messages in this queue However it may always have messages (a few failure
messages are acceptable) It does not cause data loss since all TLogs are eventually recovered by batch data
loading process However it needs attention if the number of messages grows suddenly in this queue This
may indicate a larger problem You are required to check the application log and server log to identify the
reason for this problem
Performance monitoring There are performance related messages in the application log They need to be
checked regularly to make sure performance is stable especially when the customer is gradually migrating
stores to the SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION system During this period of time the load on SAP RETURNS
AUTHORIZATION is gradually growing If the log shows a downgrade in performance that is potentially
unexpected while new stores are being added it might be an early alert that needs more investigation
The performance of the authorization engine trickle service and batch loading need to be monitored
516 Categories of System Components for Backup and Restore
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
I Only software no
configuration or
application data
- No backup new
installation in case of a
recovery or
- Initial software backup
after installation and
upgrade
- Backup of log files
BDOC Modeler
II Only software and
configuration
information no
application data
- Backup after changes
have been applied or
- No backup new
installation and
configuration in case of a
recovery
- Backup of log files
SAP Gateway
Comm Station
SAP Business
Connector
SAP IPC (20C)
III Only replicated
application data
Replication time is
sufficiently small for a
recovery
Data
- No data backup needed
- Backup of software
configuration and log
files
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
SAP IPC (20B)
Webserver
SAP ITS
IV Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended as
Data
- Application specific file
system backup or
SAP IMSSearch
Engine
Webserver
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 87
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
replication time is too
long data not managed
by a DBMS
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
V Only replicated
application data Backup
recommended because
replication time is too
long data managed by a
DBMS
Data
- Database and log
backup or
- Multiple instances
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP IPC (20B)
Catalog Server
VI Original application data
standalone system data
not managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Webserver
VII Original application data
standalone system data
managed by a DBMS not
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup
- Backup of software
- Configuration
- log files
VIII Original application data
standalone system
based on SAP NetWeaver
AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system)
- Backup of software
configuration log files
Standalone SAP
SAP System
IX Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data not
managed by a DBMS
Data
- Application specific file
system backup data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
X Original application data
data exchange with other
systems data managed
by a DBMS not based on
SAP NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup data consistency
with other systems must
be considered
SAP liveCache
SAP Mobile
Workbench
88
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
SAP RETURNS AUTHORIZATION
Categories of System
Components
Category Properties Suggested Methods for
Backup and Restore
Examples
- Backup of software
configuration log files
XI Original application data
data exchange with other
systems based on SAP
NetWeaver AS
Data
- Database and log
backup application log
backup (such as job logs
in file system) data
consistency with other
systems must be
considered
- Backup of software
configuration log files
SAP System
SAP CRM
SAP APO
SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide
Support Desk Management
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved 89
6 Support Desk Management
Support Desk Management enables you to set up an efficient internal support desk for your support organization
that seamlessly integrates your end users internal support employees partners and SAP Active Global Support
specialists with an efficient problem resolution procedure
For support desk management you need the methodology management procedures and tools infrastructure to
run your internal support organization efficiently
The following topics are covered
Remote Support
References to problem-solving solutions
Responsibility for monitoring interfaces
Responsibility for analyzing interface problems
Responsibility for solving interface problems
Typical problems
Component hierarchy relevant for this application
61 Remote Support Setup
SAP support needs to be able to work remotely for highest efficiency and availability Therefore all required
support tools must be remotely accessible for SAP support
62 Problem Message Handover
Describe the SAP component hierarchy names to be used for sending problem messagestickets to SAP
Which additional information shall be provided in a problem message per related component
90
CUSTOMER
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
SAP Point-of-Sale 23 Application Operations Guide Application Operations Guide
Appendix
7 Appendix
71 Related Guides
You can find more information about installation and configuration in the Master Guide
wwwsapcomcontactsap
copy 2015 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
notice
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System ads System i5 System
p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10 z9
iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS
S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise
Server PowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6
POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipes
BladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2
Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX
Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and
other countries
Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States andor other countries
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the
Open Group
Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame
VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Citrix Systems Inc
HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc
used under license for technology invented and implemented by
Netscape
SAP R3 xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge
ByDesign SAP Business ByDesign and other SAP products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world All other product and
service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only National product specifications may vary
These materials are subject to change without notice These
materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (SAP
Group) for informational purposes only without representation or
warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting
an additional warranty